Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

are found in early Prose and

  • 1 ἀγορεύω

    ἀγορ-εύω ([etym.] ἀγορά), [tense] impf. ἠγόρευον, [dialect] Ep.
    A

    ἀγόρευον Il.1.385

    : [tense] fut.

    - εύσω Hom.

    , Alciphr.3.52, Philostr.VA4.45: [tense] aor.

    - ευσα Hom.

    , D.H.1.65, Luc.Pisc.15: [tense] pf.

    - ευκα Lib.Or.37.4

    : 1 [tense] aor. [voice] Pass. - εύθην ([etym.] προσ-) Str.3.3.5: in compds. these tenses and [tense] pf. [voice] Pass. - ευμαι are found in early Prose and [dialect] Att. Inscrr., the simple vb. only in [tense] pres. and [tense] impf.:—speak in the assembly, harangue, freq.in [dialect] Ep.,

    ἀγορὰς ἀ. Il.2.788

    ;

    ἐν Ἀργείοις ἔπεα πτερόεντ' ἀ. 23.535

    ;

    ὣς Ἕκτωρ ἀγόρευε 8.542

    ; τοῖσιν ἀ. address them, 1.571, al.;

    πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἔπεα 24.142

    ;

    ὀνειδίζων ἀ. Od.18.380

    : in [dialect] Att., of the crier's proclamation in the Ecclesia, τίς ἀγορεύειν βούλεται; who wishes to address the house? Ar.Ach.45, D.18.170, etc.;

    ἀ. ὡς.. Il.1.109

    : c. inf., μή τιφόβονδ' ἀγόρευε counsel me not to flight, Il 5.252;

    ἀ. μὴστρατεύεσθαι Hdt.7.10

    .ά.
    2 generally, speak, say,

    τοιαῦταπρὸς ἀλλήλους ἀγόρευον Il.5.274

    ;

    κακόν τιἀ. τινά Od.18.15

    ;

    κακῶς ἀ. τινά Arist.Fr. 417

    ; ἀ. ὡς.., ὅτι .., Hdt.3.156, Ar.Pl. 102;

    οὐκ ἠγόρευον;

     did I not say so?

    Id.Ach.41

    , cf. S.OC 838; tell of, mention, τι Od.2.318, 16.263, al.; ὑπὲρ τοῦ Διὸς ἀγορεύων speaking of Zeus, Pl.Lg. 776e: metaph., δέρμα θηρὸς ἀ. χειρῶν ἔργον tells a tale of.. Theoc.25.175.
    3 proclaim, Il.1.385;

    πέμπων κήρυκα ἠγόρευέ σφι τάδε Hdt.6.97

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    ὁ πολίτης.. κακὸς ἀγορευέσθω Pl.Lg. 917d

    :— [tense] aor.[voice] Med., ἀγορεύσασθαι ὡς .. to have it proclaimed that.., Hdt.9.26:— ὁ νόμος ἀ. the law declares, Antipho 3.3.7, Lys.9.9, Arist.Rh. 1354a22;

    ἀ. μὴ ποιεῖν Ar.Ra. 628

    ;

    οὔνομα.. ἥδ' ἀ. στήλη IG2.2753

    .
    4 [voice] Pass., to be delivered,

    λόγον καλὸν ἐπὶ τοῖς.. θαπτομένοις -εσθαι Th. 2.35

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀγορεύω

  • 2 σῶς

    σῶς (A), ὁ, ἡ, σῶν, τό, defect. Adj. of which the foll. forms occur: [dialect] Att. and later Gr. nom. σῶς, σῶν, Th.8.81, D.21.126; acc.
    A

    σῶν Th.3.34

    , D.20.142; nom. pl. σῷ (written σῶ, but cf. EM742.1 )cited by Ael.Dion. Fr. 302 from Th.1.74 (where σῶοι codd.); also σοῖ Ael.Dion.l.c.; acc. pl.masc.

    σῶς D.5.17

    , 8.16, 19.75, Luc.Phal.2.4; fem.sg.

    σᾶ Ar.Fr. 631

    , IG14.644.15 ([place name] Bruttium), prob. in ib.22.123.8, but σῶς as fem., E.Cyc. 294, Ar.Fr. 658, Pl.Phd. 106a, Call.Aet.3.1.40; neut. pl.

    σᾶ E.Fr. 762

    , Pl.Criti. 111c, Ath.Mitt.49.3 (Attica, iv B.C.): [dialect] Ep. nom. sg. masc. σῶς ll.22.332 (here guaranteed by the metre), 13.773, Od.5.305, 15.42, 16.131, 22.28;

    σόος 19.300

    ; acc.

    σῶν Il.1.117

     (v.l. σόον, σάον), 17.367 (v.l. σόον)

    ; σόον 7.310

    , 8.246, 16.252 (v.l. σάον); nom. sg. fem.

    σόη 15.497

    ; nom. pl. masc.

    σόοι 1.344

    , 5.531, 15.563, Od.4.98; nom. pl. neut.

    σόα Il.24.382

    , Od.13.364: Hdt. has nom. sg.

    σῶς 1.24

    , al.; neut. σόον (v.l. σῶον) 2.181; pl. σόοι (v.l. σῶοι) 8.39; fem. σόαι ( σῶαι codd.) 1.66; neut. σόα (v.l. σῶα) 4.124, 6.86.ά; gen. pl. neut. σόων (v.l. σώων) 2.121.β: Hp. has

    σῶον Art.53

    : the stem σωο- never appears in Hom. or early poets, but is found in later poetry (nom.

    σῶος Max.386

    ; [comp] Comp.

    σωότερος A.R.1.918

    ), and in an [dialect] Att. prose Inscr., neut.

    σῶον IG12.59.13

    , along with σῶν ib.128.6, 22.1172.14; the foll. forms from σωο- are found in [dialect] Att. and later texts:

    σῶος X.An.3.1.32

    , Luc.Abd.5;

    σῶον Lys.7.17

    , 20.24, Arist. Oec. 1347a24, Plu.2.786f,Sor.2.60,Aristid. 1.425 J., Lib. Or.48.3;

    σῶοι X.An.2.2.21

    , al., D.19.57, 153,326;

    σώους Luc.Laps.8

    , Aristid.1.426 J.;

    σῶα X.Cyr.7.4.13

    , HG1.1.24, Arist. Ath.30.4; fem.

    σώα X.HG7.4.4

    , D.56.37, Aristid.2.78 J.; acc.

    σώαν D.21.177

    , Aristid.2.428 J.; gen.

    σώας D.19.78

    , OGI214.20 (Didyma, iii B.C.): the Papyri have acc.sg.masc.

    σῶον PLond.2.301.13

     (ii A.D.), etc., acc. pl. neut.

    σῶα BGU1106.31

     (i B.C.), etc.: the word is rare in LXX, acc. sg. masc.

    σῶον 2 Ma.12.24

    ; nom. pl. fem. σῶαι (v.l. σῶοι) Thd. Bel 17; acc. pl. masc.

    σώους 3 Ma.2.7

    ; neut.

    σῶα 2 Ma.3.15

    ; not found in NT: acc. to Thom.Mag.p.328 R. σῶς is [dialect] Att. for σῶος, σῶν for σῶον (masc. and neut.), σῶς for σώους and σώας, but all other [dialect] Att. forms are un[var] contr. ([etym.] σῶοι, σῶα): the form σῷος is recommended by Did. ap. EM741.43, but rejected by Hdn.Gr.ib.46 (cf. Hdn.Gr.2.53), and is found in cod. Σ of D.18.49, al.;

    σῴην Babr.94.8

    ;

    σῷον AP6.349.6

     (Phld.): the form σάος is preserved as v.l. in Il.1.117 (ap.A.D.Conj. 223.10), 16.252, and in the [comp] Comp. σαώτερος, v. σάος:—safe and sound, alive and well, of persons,

    ἔφης.. σῶς ἔσσεσθ' Il.22.332

    ;

    οὕνεκά οἱ σῶς ἐσσι Od.15.42

    ;

    ὅτι οἱ σῶς εἰμι 16.131

    ; βούλομ' ἐγὼ λαὸν σῶν (v.l. σόον, σάον)

    ἔμμεναι Il.1.117

    , cf. 8.246;

    σόοι ἔμμεναι Od.4.98

    ;

    ἄλοχός τε σόη καὶ παῖδες Il.15.497

    ;

    σόοι εἶναι Hdt.5.96

    ;

    σῶς καὶ ὑγιής Id.4.76

    , Th.3.34, Pl.Ti. 82b.
    II of things, safe, whole, ἵνα περ τάδε τοι σόα μίμνῃ (sc. τὰ κειμήλια) Il.24.382, cf. Od.13.364, Hdt.6.86.ά; οὐδέ κε φαίης ἠέλιον σῶν ἔμμεναι (v.l. σόον) Il.17.367; so ἄγαλμα.., τὸ ἔτι καὶ ἐς ἐμὲ ἦν σόον was preserved, extant, Hdt.2.181;

    αἱ πέδαι ἔτι καὶ ἐς ἐμὲ ἦσαν σόαι Id.1.66

    , cf. 8.39;

    ποτὸν.., εῐπερ ἐστὶ σῶν S.Ph. 21

    ;

    ἔστι σῶν [θοἰμάτιον] καὶ σὐκ ἀπόλωλεν Pl.Phd. 87b

    ; ἡ χιὼν οὖσα σῶς καὶ ἄτηκτος ib. 106a; τὸ ἀθάνατον σῶν καὶ ἀδιάφθορον ib.e;

    ἔχειν τι σῶν X.An.7.6.32

    ; τῶν σημάντρων ἐόντων σόων intact, Hdt.2.121.β ; σῶαι αἱ σφραγῖδες; LXX Bel17;

    παραδώσω τὸν γόμον σῶον καὶ ἀκακούργητον PLond 2.301.13

     (ii A.D.);

    ἅ τε ἐὰν λάβῃ, σῶα συντηρήσειν καὶ ἀποδώσειν BGU1106.31

     (i B.C.); of money, intact, undiminished, E.Hec. 994;

    τἀργύριον σῶν παρέχειν Ar.Lys. 488

    , IG22.1172.14, cf. Pl.R. 333c;

    σῶα ἀποδιδόναι τὰ χρήματα X.Cyr.7.4.13

    .
    2 of events, safe, sure, certain,

    νῦν τοι (μοι) σῶς αἰπὺς ὄλεθρος Il.13.773

    , Od.5.305, 22.28. ( σάϝος, cf. Cypr. pr. n. Σαϝοκλέϝης.)
    ------------------------------------
    σῶς (B), [var] contr. for σόος, σοῦς, ὁ,
    A = βλάστησις, dub. in Hsch. s.v. σῶν.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σῶς

  • 3 σύν

    σύν [pron. full] [ῠ], old [dialect] Att. [full] ξύν; [dialect] Boeot. [full] σούν IG7.3171.39 (Orchom. [dialect] Boeot., iii B.C.): Prep. with dat. (rarely c. gen., σ. τῶν ἐν αὺτῷ νεκρῶν Mitteis Chr.129.23 (ii B.C.);
    A

    σ. ἡρώων IPE2.383

     ([place name] Phanagoria); σ. γυναικός ib.301 ([place name] Panticapaeum), cf. Ostr.240.5 (ii A.D.), PLond.1.113 iv 19 (vi A.D.)):—with. The form ξύν rarely occurs in Hom., though it is not rare in compds. even when not required by the metre, as in ξυνέαξα, ξυνοχῇσιν, ξύμβλητο, ξύμπαντα; Hes. also uses ξύμπας, ξυνιέναι; in [dialect] Ion. verse we find

    ξύν Thgn.1063

     (but

    σύν Id.50

    ), Sol. 19.3 (perh. old Attic), but

    σύν Archil.4

    , cf. ξυνωνίη, συνίημι; in early [dialect] Ion. Prose (including Inscrr., cf. SIG1.2 (Abu Simbel, vi B.C.), 167.37 (Mylasa, iv B.C.), etc.) ξύν is only found in

    ξυνίημι Heraclit.51

    , Democr.95 (cf. ἀξύνετος, ἀξυνεσίη, ξύνεσις), and in the phrase ξὺν νῷ ( νόῳ codd.) Heraclit.114, Democr.35; Hdt. has only σύν, and in codd. Hp. ξύν has weaker authority than σύν (i p.cxxv Kuehlewein); in the late Ionic of Aret., ξύν prevails over σύν; in [dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Dor. it is rare,

    ξυνοίκην Sapph.75

    ;

    ξυναλίαξε Ar.Lys.93

    ; elsewh. [dialect] Dor. σύν, Leg.Gort. 5.6, IG9(1).334.47 ([dialect] Locr., v B.C.), etc.; but in old [dialect] Att. Inscrr. ξύν is the only form up to 500 B.C.; σύν appears in v B.C. and becomes usual towards the end; after 378 B.C. ξύν survives only in the formula γνώμην δὲ ξυμβάλλεσθαι κτλ.; the phrase ξὺν νῷ is found in Ar.Nu. 580, Pl.Cri. 48c, Men. 88b, R. 619b (

    σὺν E.Or. 909

    ); otherwise, of [dialect] Att. Prose writers Th. alone uses the preposition ξύν, Antipho and Lysias have ξυν- a few times in compds.; codd. Pl. have both ξυν- (Lg. 930a, al.) and συν-; in Antipho Soph.Oxy.1364, Aristox., Arr., Ael., and Anon.Rhythm. ξυν- is very freq.; in Trag. both forms occur. The Prep. σύν gradually gave way to μετά with gen., so that whereas A. has 67 examples of σύν to 8 of μετά with gen., the proportions in Th. are 400 of μετά to 37 of σύν, in D. 346 of μετά to 15 of σύν, and in Arist. 300 of μετά to 8 of σύν: for these and other statistics see C. J. T. Mommsen, Beiträge zur Lehre von den griechischen Präpositionen (Frankfurt 1886-95): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. σύν is restricted for the most part to signf. 8, 9 and a few phrases, such as σὺν θεῷ, σὺν (τοῖς) ὅπλοις; Xenophon uses it freely, having 556 examples to 275 of μετά; in Pap., NT, and later Prose its use is much less restricted (v. infr.).
    1 in company with, together with,

    δεῦρό ποτ' ἤλυθε.. σ. Μενελάῳ Il.3.206

    ;

    ξ. παιδὶ.. πύργῳ ἐφεστήκει 6.372

    ;

    σ. τοῖσδε ὑπέκφυγον Od.9.286

    ;

    καταφθίσθαι σ. ἐκείνῳ 2.183

    ;

    ἀπελαύνειν σ. τῷ στρατῷ Hdt.8.101

    ;

    ἐπαιδεύετο σ. τῷ ἀδελφῷ X.An.1.9.2

    ;

    σ. αὐτῷ σταυροῦσι δύο λῃστάς Ev.Marc.15.27

    ;

    οὐδένα ἔχω σ. ἐμοί PSI10.1161.12

     (iv A.D.).
    2 with collat. notion of help or aid, σ. θεῷ with God's help or blessing, as God wills, Il.9.49;

    σ. σοί, πότνα θεά Od.13.391

    ;

    πέμψον δέ με σ. γε θεοῖσιν Il.24.430

    , cf. 15.26;

    σ. θεῷ φυτευθεὶς ὄλβος Pi.N.8.17

    ; σ. θεῷ εἰρημένον spoken as by inspiration, Hdt.1.86;

    σ. θεῷ δ' εἰρήσεται Ar.Pl. 114

    ;

    σ. θεῷ εἰπεῖν Pl.Tht. 151b

    , Prt. 317b;

    ξ. θεοῖς Th.1.86

    ; so σ. δαίμονι, σ. Ἀθήνῃ καὶ Διί, Il.11.792, 20.192;

    σ. Χαρίτεσσιν Pi.N.9.54

    , cf. P.9.2;

    ξ. τῷ θεῷ πᾶς καὶ γελᾷ κὠδύρεται S.Aj. 383

    ; also θεοῦ σ. παλάμᾳ, σ. θεοῦ τύχᾳ, Pi.O.10(11).21, N.6.24: generally, of personal cooperation, σ. σοὶ φραζέσθω let him consult with you, Il.9.346;

    λοχησάμενος σ. ἑταίρῳ Od.13.268

    ; ξ. τῇ βουλῇ in consultation with the Council, IG12.63.17; σ. τινὶ μάχεσθαι fight at his side, X.Cyr.5.3.5, cf. HG4.1.34; σ. τινὶ εἶναι or γίγνεσθαι to be with another, i.e.on his side, of his party, Id.An.3.1.21, Smp.5.10; οἱ σ. αὐτῷ his friends, followers, Id.An.1.2.15, cf. Act.Ap.14.4, etc.
    3 furnished with, endued with,

    σ. μεγάλῃ ἀρετῇ ἐκτήσω ἄκοιτιν Od.24.193

    ;

    πόλιν θεοδμάτῳ σ. ἐλευθερίᾳ ἔκτισσε Pi.P.1.61

    .
    4 of things that belong, or are attached, to a person, σ. νηΐ or σ. νηυσί, i.e. on board ship, Il.1.389, 179, etc.; σ. νηυσὶν ἀλαπάξαι, opp. πεζός, 9.328 (so in Prose,

    σ. ναυσὶ προσπλεῖν X.HG2.2.7

    , etc.);

    σ. ἵπποισιν καὶ ὄχεσφιν Il.5.219

    ; esp. of arms,

    μιν κατέκηε σ. ἔντεσι 6.418

    ;

    στῆ δ' εὐρὰξ σ. δουρί 15.541

    ; ἀντιβίην or ἀντίβιον σ. ἔντεσι or σ. τεύχεσι πειρηθῆναι, 5.220, 11.386;

    σ. ἔντεσι μάρνασθαι 13.719

    ;

    σκῆπτρον, σ. τῷ ἔβη 2.47

    ; ἄγγελος ἦλθε.. σ. ἀγγελίῃ ib. 787; ς. (or ξ.)

    ὅπλοις Th.2.2

    , al., Pl.Lg. 947c, Aen.Tact.17.1; ς. (or ξ.)

    τοῖς ὅπλοις Th.2.90

    , 4.14, Hell.Oxy. 10.1, Pl.Lg. 763a, Aen.Tact.11.8;

    σ. ἐγχειριδίοις Hell.Oxy.10.2

    ;

    ξ. ξιφιδίῳ καὶ θώρακι Th.3.22

    ;

    ξ. ἑνὶ ἱματίῳ Id.2.70

    ; in some such cases ς. is little more than expletive, as σ. τεύχεσι θωρηχθέντες ll.8.530, etc.: with αὐτός (cf.

    αὐτός 1.5

    ), chiefly in Hom.,

    ἀνόρουσεν αὐτῇ σ. φόρμιγγι Il.9.194

    , cf. 14.498;

    αὐτῷ σ. τε λίνῳ καὶ ῥήγεϊ Od.13.118

    .
    5 of things accompanying, or of concurrent circumstances,

    ἄνεμος σ. λαίλαπι Il.17.57

    , cf. Od.12.408; of coincidence in time,

    ἄκρᾳ σ. ἑσπέρᾳ Pi.P.11.10

    ; καιρῷ σ. ἀτρεκεῖ ib.8.7;

    σ. τῷ Χρόνῳ προϊόντι X.Cyr.8.7.6

    ; in the course of,

    κείνῳ σ. ἄματι B.10.23

    , cf. 125, Pi.Fr. 123.
    6 of necessary connexion or consequence, σὺν μεγάλῳ ἀποτεῖσαι to pay with a great loss, i.e. suffer greatly, Il.4.161; δημοσίῳ σ. κακῷ with loss to the public, Thgn.50; σ. τῷ σῷ ἀγαθῷ to your advantage, X.Cyr.3.1.15; ὤλοντο.. σὺν μιάς ματι with pollution, S.Ant. 172; to denote agreement, in accordance with,

    σ. τῷ δικαίῳ καὶ καλῷ X.An.2.6.18

    ;

    σ. δίκᾳ Pi.P.9.96

    ;

    σ. κόσμῳ Hdt.8.86

    , Arist.Mu. 398b23;

    σ. τάχει S.El. 872

    , etc.
    7 of the instrument or means, with the help of, by means of,

    σ. ἐλαίῳ φαρμακώσαισα Pi.P.4.221

    ;

    διήλλαχθε σ. σιδάρῳ A.Th. 885

     (lyr.);

    πλοῦτον ἐκτήσω ξ. αἰχμῇ Id.Pers. 755

     (troch.);

    ἡ [τῶν φίλων] κτῆσίς ἐστιν οὐδαμῶς σ. τῇ βίᾳ X.Cyr.8.7.13

    ;

    ξ. ἐπαίνῳ Th.1.84

    .
    8 including,

    κεφάλαιον σ. ἐπωνίοις IG12.329.5

    , cf. 22.1388.85, 1407.12, al.;

    τοῦ Πειραιῶς ξ. Μουνυχίᾳ Th.2.13

    , cf. 4.124, 5.26, 74, 7.42, 8.90, 95; δισχίλιαι γάρ εἰσι (sc. δραχμαὶ)

    σ. ταῖς Νικίου Ar.Fr. 100

    ;

    ἀνήλωσα σ. τῇ τῆς σκευῆς ἀναθέσει ἑκκαίδεκα μνᾶς Lys.21.4

    , cf. 2;

    αἶγας ἀπέδοτο σ. τῷ αἰπόλῳ τριῶν καὶ δέκα μνῶν Is.6.33

    , cf. 8.8,35, 11.42,46, Aeschin. 2.162, D.19.155, 27.23,al., Arist.HA 525b15,17, Ath.19.6, Hipparch. 1.1.9, al., PSI10.1124.14 (ii A.D.).
    9 excluding, apart from, plus, ἓξ ἐμοὶ σ. ἑβδόμῳ six with (but not including) me the seventh, A. Th. 283;

    αἱ γὰρ καμπαὶ τέτταρες, ἢ δύο σ. τοῖς πτερυγίοις Arist.HA 490a32

    ;

    σ. τοῖς ἀρχαίοις τὸν οἶκον ἐκ τῶν προσόδων μείζω ποιῆσαι D. 27.61

    ;

    τὴν ἐφαπτίδα σ. τῇ σακκοπήρᾳ ἐν ᾗ ἐνῆν

     together with..,

    PEnteux.32.7

    , cf. 89.9 (iii B.C.);

    οἱ γραμματεῖς σ. τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις Ev.Luc.20.1

    , cf. Ep.Gal.5.24.
    B POSITION:— σύν sts. follows its case, Il.10.19, Od.9.332, 15.410. It freq. stands between Adj. and Subst., as Od.11.359, Il.9.194, etc.; more rarely between Subst. and Adj., Od.13.258, Pi.P. 8.7.
    2 freq. in tmesis in Hom., as Il.23.687, Od.14.296, etc.
    3 in late Gr. σὺν καὶ c. dat.,

    στεφανηφορήσας σ. καὶ Αὐρ. Ἰάσονι IG12(7).259

     (Amorgos, iii A.D.), cf. Supp.Epigr.4.535 (Ephesus, ii/iii A.D.), Rev.Phil.50.11 (Sardis, i/iii A.D.), CPR26.16 (ii A.D.); cf. infr. c. 2.
    C σύν AS ADV., together, at once,

    κενεὰς σ. Χεῖρας ἔχοντες Od.10.42

    ; mostly folld. by δέ or τε

    , σ. δὲ πτερὰ πυκνὰ λίασθεν Il.23.879

    ;

    σ. τε δύ' ἐρχομένω 10.224

     (cf. σύνδυο)

    ; ξ. τε διπλοῖ βασιλῆς S.Aj. 960

     (lyr.). It is sts. hard to distinguish this from tmesis, e.g. in Il.23.879; so ξὺν κακῶς ποιεῖν is = Ξυγκακοποιεῖν in Th.3.13. In Old Testament Gr. it is sts. used to translate the Hebr. 'ēth (particle prefixed to the definite accus.) through confusion with the Prep. 'ēth 'with',

    ἐμίσησα σὺν τὴν ζωήν LXXEc.2.17

    ; οὐκ ἐμνήσθη σ. τοῦ ἀνδρός ib.9.15;

    ἔκτισεν ὁ θεὸς σὺν τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ σὺν τὴν γῆν Aq.Ge.1.1

    , etc.
    2 besides, also,

    σ. δὲ πλουτίζειν ἐμέ A.Ag. 586

    ;

    σ. δ' αὔτως ἐγώ S.Ant. 85

    , etc.;

    σ. δ' ἐγὼ παρών Id.Aj. 1288

    , cf. El. 299;

    Δίρκα τε.. σ. τ' Ἀσωπιάδες κόραι E.HF 785

     (lyr.); in later Poetry

    σ. καί A.R.1.74

    , Herod.4.3, Nic.Th.8, D.P.843 (also in late Prose, Ath.2.49a; cf. supr. B. 3).
    I with, along with, together, at the same time, hence of any kind of union, connexion, or participation in a thing, and metaph. of agreement or unity. In Compos. with a trans. Verb σύν may refer to the Object as well as the Subject, as συγκατακτείνειν may mean kill one person as well as another, or, join with another in killing.
    2 of the completion of an action, altogether, completely, as in

    συνάγνυμι, συνασκέω 2

    , συνθρύπτω, συγκόπτω, συμπατέω, συμπληρόω, συντελέω, συντέμνω; sts., therefore, it seems only to strengthen the force of the simple word.
    3 joined with numerals, σύνδυο two together, which sense often becomes distributive, by twos, two and two; so σύντρεις, σύμπεντε, etc., like Lat. bini, terni, etc.
    II σύν in Compos., before β μ π φ ψ, becomes συμ-; before γ κ ξ Χ, συγ-; before λ συλ-; before ς usu. συς-; but becomes συ- before ς followed by a conson. (e.g. συστῆναι), before ζ, and perh. sts. before ξ. In a poet. passage, ap.Pl.Phdr. 237a, we have ξύμ alone in tmesi, ξύμ μοι λάβεσθε for συλλάβεσθέ μοι; cf.

    ὅτε ξὺμ πρῶτ' ἐφύοντο Emp.95

    : in Inscrr. and Papyri these assimilations are freq. not found.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σύν

  • 4 ἐπεί

    ἐπεί, Conj., both temporal and causal; also [full] ἐπειδή, [full] ἐπείτε.
    A OF TIME ( ἐπειδή is more freq. in this sense in Prose), after that, since, when, from Hom. downwds.:
    I with Ind.,
    1 of a definite occurrence in past time, mostly c. [tense] aor., ἐπεί π' εὔξαντο after they had prayed, Il.1.458;

    ἐπειδὴ ἐτελεύτησε Δαρεῖος καὶ κατέστη Ἀρταξέρξης

     after

    D.

     had died and A. had succeeded, X.An.1.1.3: rarely c. [tense] impf.,

    ἐπειδὴ εἱστιώμεθ' Ar.Nu. 1354

    ;

    ἐ. πόντον εἰσεβάλλομεν E.IT 260

    ;

    ἐ. ἠσθένει Δαρεῖος X.An.1.1.1

    : c. [tense] plpf., ἐπειδὴ ἐξηπάτησθε.. after you had been deceived.., D.18.42; but generally the [tense] aor. is found, the [tense] plpf. being used only for special emphasis: c. [tense] impf. to express an action not yet complete, ἐπεὶ ὑπηντίαζεν ἡ φάλαγξ καὶ ἡ σάλπιγξ ἐφθέγξατο after the phalanx began to advance and the trumpet had sounded, X.An.6.5.27.
    2 with implied reference to some later time, ἐ. or ἐπειδή, = ἐξ οὗ, from the time when, since, mostly c. [tense] aor.,

    πολλὰ πλάγχθη, ἐ. ἔπερσε Od.1.2

    ; ἐπείτε παρέλαβον τὸν θρόνον, τοῦτο ἐφρόντιζον ever since I came to the throne, I had this in mind, Hdt.7.8.

    ά; ἐπειδήπερ ὑπέστη Th.8.68

    ;

    δέκατον μὲν ἔτος τόδ' ἐ... ἦραν A.Ag. 40

    : sts. c. [tense] pres. (used in [tense] pf. sense) and [tense] pf., ἐ. δὲ φροῦδός ἐστι στρατός since the army is gone, S.Ant.15; ἐπείτε ὑπὸ τῷ Πέρσῃ εἰσί, πεπόνθασι τοιόνδε ever since they have been, now that they are.., Hdt.3.117.
    II with Subj., ἄν being always added in [dialect] Att. Prose, and ἄν or κε generally in Poetry: ἐπεί with ἄν becomes ἐπήν (so in Com., Ar.Lys. 1175,Av. 983), later ἐπάν (q.v.), [dialect] Ion.

    ἐπεάν Schwyzer 800

     (vi B.C.), Hdt.3.153, al.,

    ἐπήν Hp.Fract.6

    , al., and ἐπειδή with ἄν ἐπειδάν (q.v.); Hom. has ἐπεί κε, ἐπήν (once

    ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412

    ):
    1 referring to future time with [tense] fut. apodosis, τέκνα ἄξομεν.. ἐπὴν πτολίεθρον ἕλωμεν when we shall have taken the city, Il.4.238;

    ἐ. κ' ἀπὸ λαὸς ὄληται 11.764

    . cf. Od.17.23;

    ἐπεάν περ ἡμίονοι τέκωσι, τότε τὸ τεῖχος ἁλώσεσθαι Hdt.3.153

    ; ταῦτ', ἐπειδὰν περὶ τοῦ γένους εἴπω, τότ' ἐρῶ I will speak of this, when I have spoken.., D.57.16, cf. X.An.2.3.29;

    ἐ. ἂν σύ γε πότ μον ἐπίσπῃς Il.6.412

    ; χρὴ δέ, ὅταν μὲν τιθῆσθε τοὺς νόμους,.. σκοπεῖν, ἐπειδὰν δὲ θῆσθε, φυλάττειν whenever you are enacting your laws,.. and after you have enacted them.., D.21.34.
    2 of repeated action, with a [tense] pres. apodosis, whenever, when once,

    δαμνᾷ, ἐ. κε λίπῃ ὀστέα θυμός Od.11.221

    , cf. Il.9.409; ἐπειδὰν ἡ ἐκφορὰ ᾖ.. ἄγουσι whenever the burial takes place they bring, Th.2.34; ἐπειδὰν κρύψωσι γῇ.. λέγει when they have covered them with earth, ibid.: sts. without ἄν or κε in Poets,

    ἐ. ἂρ βλέφαρ' ἀμφικαλύψῃ Od.20.86

    ;

    ἐ. δὴ τόν γε δαμάσσεται.. ὀϊστός Il.11.478

    , cf. S.OC 1225 (lyr.), Ant. 1025.
    3 like A.1.2, δέκα ἡμερῶν ἐπειδὰν δόξῃ within ten days from the passing of the resolution, IG12.88.7.
    III with Opt. (without ἄν):
    1 referring to future time, ἐπειδὴ πρὸς τὸ φῶς ἔλθοι, ὁρᾶν οὐδ' ἂν ἓν δύνασθαι (sc. οὐκ οἴει); after he had come into the light.., Pl.R. 516a: Hom. sts. uses ἐπήν with opt. in same sense as ἐπεί, Il.24.227, Od.2.105 (codd.), etc.
    2 more freq. of repeated action, with a past apodosis,

    ἐ. ζεύξειεν.., δησάσκετο Il.24.14

    ;

    ἐπειδὴ δέ τι ἐμφάγοιεν, ἀνίσταντο X.An.4.5.9

    ;

    ἐ. πύθοιτο, ἐπῄνει Id.Cyr.5.3.55

    , cf. Th.8.38, Pl.Phd. 59d, Prt. 315b.
    3 in orat. obliq. after past tenses, representing a subj. in orat. rect., αὐτὸς δὲ ἐπεὶ διαβαίης, ἀπιέναι ἔφησθα (the direct form being ἐπὴν διαβῶ) X.An. 7.2.27, cf. 3.5.18, Cyr.1.4.21; after opt. in a final clause, ἐπορεύοντο,

    ὅπως ἐπειδὴ γένοιντο ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ.. ἴοιεν Th.7.80

    .
    4 by assimilation to opt. in principal clause,

    ἦ τ' ἂν.. νῦν μὲν ἀνώγοιμι πτολεμίζειν.. ἐπὴν τεισαίμεθα λώβην Il.19.208

    ;

    ὃς τὸ καταβρόξειεν ἐπεὶ κρητῆρι μιγείη Od.4.222

    .
    5 ἐπειδάν c. opt. is f.l. in some passages of early authors, as X.Cyr.1.3.11, D.30.6 (c. ind., Plb.13.7.8): found in later Gr., Agath.2.5, al., Zos.5.18.10.
    IV with Inf., only in orat. obliq., ἐπειδὴ δὲ κατὰ σχολὴν σκέψασθαι, κόπτεσθαι (sc. ἔφη) Pl.R. 619c, cf.Smp. 174d, Hdt.4.10, 7.150.
    V with other words:
    1 ἐ. τάχιστα as soon as, freq. separated by a word,

    ἐ. ἦλθε τάχιστα,.. ἀπέδοτο X.An.7.2.6

    ;

    ἐ. δὲ τάχιστα διέβη Id.Cyr.3.3.22

    ;

    ἐ. θᾶττον Arist.Pol. 1284a40

    ;

    ἐ. εὐθέως X.HG3.2.4

    ;

    ἐ... αὐτίκα Pi.N.1.35

    ;

    ἐπειδὴ τάχιστα Pl.Prt. 310c

    , D.27.16;

    ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα Hdt.8.144

    , X.An.3.1.9; rarely

    ἐπειδὴ θᾶττον D.37.41

    ;

    ἐπειδὰν θᾶττον Pl.Prt. 325c

    .
    b

    ἐ. τὰ πρῶτα Il.12.420

    ;

    ἐ. τὸ πρῶτον A.Ag. 1287

    .
    2 with emphatic Particles, ἐπεὶ ἄρα when then, in continuing a narrative, Il.6.426; ἐπεὶ οὖν when then, in resuming a narrative, 1.57, 3.4;

    ἐπεὶ ὦν Hdt.3.9

    ;

    ἐπεὶ γὰρ δή Id.9.90

    , etc.
    B CAUSAL ( ἐπεί more freq. in this sense in early Prose: ἐπειδή whereas is used in preambles of decrees, IG22.103, etc.;

    ἐπειδήπερ

     inasmuch as, Ev. Luc.

    1.1

    ), since, seeing that, freq. from Hom. downwards:
    1 with Ind. (after both present and past tenses),

    ἐ. οὐδὲ ἔοικε Il.1.119

    , cf. 153, 278, Pi.O.4.16, X.Mem.2.3.4;

    ἐπειδή Th.8.80

    ;

    ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἐθέλεις Pl.Prt. 335c

    ;

    νίκη δ' ἐπείπερ ἕσπετ', ἐμπέδως μένοι A.Ag. 854

    ; freq. with past tenses with

    ἄν, ἐπεὶ οὔποτ' ἂν στόλον ἐπλεύσατ' ἄν S.Ph. 1037

    ;

    ἐπεὶ οὔ κεν ἀνιδρωτί γ' ἐτελέσθη Il.15.228

    , cf. D. 18.49; οὐ γὰρ ἂν σθένοντά γε εἷλέν μ'· ἐπεὶ οὐδ' ἂν ὧδ' ἔχοντ' (sc. εἷλεν) S.Ph. 948: esp. in the sense, for otherwise.., Pi.O.9.29, S.OT 433, X.Mem.2.7.14, Herod.2.72, etc.: so c. [tense] fut., ἐξέστω δὲ μηδενὶ.. τεθῆναι.., ἐ. ἀποδώσει.. otherwise he shall pay.., Rev.Et.Anc.4.261 (near Smyrna): c. imper., ἐ. δίδαξον for teach me, S.El. 352, OC 969, cf. OT 390, Ar.V.73, Pl.Grg. 473e: with an interrog., ἐ. πῶς ἂν καλέσειας; for how would you call him? Ar.Nu. 688, cf. Pi.P.7.5, A.Ch. 214, S. Tr. 139 (lyr.);

    ὦ Ἀλκιβιάδη, ἐπειδὴ περὶ τίνος Ἀθηναῖοι διανοοῦνται βουλεύεσθαι, ἀνίστασαι συμβουλεύσων; Pl.Alc.1.106c

    .
    2 c. Opt.,

    ἐ. ἂν μάλα τοι σχεδὸν ἔλθοι Il.9.304

    , cf. S.Aj. 916; so after past tenses on the principle of orat. obliq., ἐπείπερ ἡγήσαιντο since (as they said) they believed, X.Mem.1.4.19.
    3 c. Inf. in orat. obliq.,

    ἐ. γιγνώσκειν γε αὐτά Pl.Prt. 353a

    , cf. Hdt.8.111, Th.2.93.
    4 in elliptical expressions, ἀδύνατός [εἰμι], ἐ. ἐβουλόμην ἂν οἷός τ' εἶναι I am unable (and yet I am sorry), for I should like to have the power, Pl.Prt. 335c; so εἶμι· ἐ. καὶ ταῦτ' ἂν ἴσως οὐκ ἀηδῶς σου ἤκουον ibid. (here the sense may be given by and yet, although, cf. ib. 333c, 317a, Ap. 19e, Smp. 187a, Arist.EN 1121a19); ἐ. ὅ γε ἀποθανὼν πελάτης τις ἦν ἐμός and yet (moreover) the murdered man was my own hired man, Pl. Euthphr.4c.
    b sts. after a voc., where 'listen' may be supplied,

    Ἕκτορ, ἐ. με κατ' αἶσαν ἐνείκεσας Il.3.59

    , cf. 13.68, Od.3.103, 211.
    5 with other Particles, ἐ. ἄρα, ἐ. ἂρ δή since then, Od.17.185; ἐ. γε (

    ἐπεί.. γε Il.1.352

    , Hes. Th. 171), more emphatic than ἐ., since indeed, E.Cyc. 181, Hipp. 955; ἐπειδή γε ib. 946, Pl.Phd. 77d, D.54.29; sts. separated,

    ἐπειδή.. γε S.El. 631

    , Pl.Phd. 87c;

    ἐ. γε δή Hdt.3.9

    , S.Ant. 923,

    ἐπειδή γε καί Th.6.18

    ; ἐ. ἦ since in truth,

    ἐ. ἦ πολὺ φέρτερόν ἐστι Il.1.169

    , cf. 156, Od.9.276; ἐπείπερ (

    ἐ... περ Il.13.447

    , Od.20.181) in Trag. and Prose, A.Ag. 822, S.OC75, Pl.Phd. 114d; ἐπειδήπερ in Com. and Prose, Ar.Ach. 437, 495, Nu. 1412, Th.6.18, Pl.R. 350e; ἐ. τοι since surely, S.OC 433;

    ἐ. νύ τοι Il.1.416

    ;

    ἐ. τοι καί E. Med. 677

    , Pl.R. 567e. [ἐ. sts. begins a verse in Hom., Il.22.379, Od. 4.13, 8.452, 21.25; sts. coalesces by synizesis with οὐ, οὐδέ, etc., S. Ph. 446, 948, etc.]

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐπεί

  • 5 HINN

    * * *
    I)
    (hin, hitt), dem. pron.
    1) the other; á hinn fótinn, on the other leg; pl. the others, the rest (Kimbi bar sár sín engan mun betr en hinir);
    2) emphatically, that; hitt ek hugða, that was what I thought; hitt vil ek vita, that I want to know.
    (hin, hit), def. art., before an adjective standing alone or followed by a substantive, the, = inn, enn( eptir hinni eystri kvísl).
    * * *
    1.
    HIN, HIT, the article, an enclitic, which therefore can never serve as an accentuated syllable in a verse, either as rhyme or in alliteration. In good old MSS. (e. g. Cod. Reg. of Sæm.) it is hardly ever spelt with the aspirate, but is written inn, in, it or ið, or enn, en, et or eð, and thus distinguished from the demonstr. pron. hinn; but in the Editions the prob. spurious aspirate has been generally prefixed: an indecl. inu or hinu occurs often in later MSS. of the 14th century, e. g. the Fb.; but as it has not been heard of since and is unknown in the modern language, it simply seems to be a Norwegianism, thus, inu sömu orð, Th. 2; hinnu fyrri biskupa (gen. pl.), H. E. ii. 79; enu instu luti ( res intimas), Hom. 57 (Norse MS.); hinu ágæztu menn (nom. pl.), id.; innu óargu dýra, 657 A. ii. 12: [cp. Goth. jains = ἐκεινος; A. S. geond; Engl. yon; Germ. jener.]
    A. The:
    I. preceding the noun:
    1. before an adjective standing alone or followed by a substantive; inn mæri, inn ríki, inn dimmi dreki, inn mikli mögr, Vsp.; in aldna, id.; inn góða mjöð, the good mead, Gm. 13; inn mæra mjöð, Skm. 16; inn helga mjöð, Sdm. 18; in forna fold, Hým. 24; in fríða frilla, 30; inn fróði jötum, Vþm. 20; inn gamli þulr, 9; inn hára þul, Fm. 34; inn fráni ormr, 19; opt inn betri bilar þá er inn verri vegr, Hm. 127; in alsnotra ambátt, in arma, Þkv.; enn fróði afi, Skm. 2; in ílla mæra, 32; enn fráni ormr, 27; eð manunga man, Hm. 163; enn aldna jötun, 104; en horska mær, 95; it betra, Stor. 22; ena þriðju, the third, Vsp. 20; inn móður-lausi mögr, Fm. 2; it gjalla gull, ok it glóðrauða fé, 9; ið fyrsta orð, Sdm. 14; enu skírleita goði, Gm. 39; in glýstömu græti, Hðm. 1; in svásu goð, Vþm. 17; enum frægja syni, Hm. 141; at ins tryggva vinar, 66; ennar góðu konu, 100; ins svinna mans, 162; ens dýra mjaðar, 141; ens hindra dags, 109; ens unga mans, Skm. 11; ens deykkva hrafns, Skv. 2. 20; æ til ins eina dags, Fm. 10; ena níundu hverja nótt, Skm. 21: with the ordinals, inn fyrsti, þriði …, Gm. 6 sqq., Sdm. 21 sqq.
    2. so also before an adverb; it sama, likewise, Hm. 75, Fm. 4, Vþm. 22, 23, Gm. 15, Hdl. 26.
    3. as an indecl. particle ‘in’ or ‘en’ before a comparative; in heldr, the more, Hm. 60, Sdm. 36, Hkv. 1. 12, Skv. 1. 21, Gh. 3, Nj. 219; in lengr, the longer, Am. 58, 61; this has been already mentioned s. v. en (p. 127, B. at bottom, and p. 128), but it is almost exclusively poetical.
    II. placed between a pronoun and an adjective in the definite form:
    1. after a demonstr.; sá inn fráni ormr, Fm. 26; sá inn harði hallr, Gs. 10; sá inn aldni jötun, Skm. 25; sá inn ámáttki jötunn, 10; þat ið mikla men, Þkv. 13; þat ið litla, ‘that the little,’ i. e. the little thing, Ls. 44: þann inn alsvinna jötun, Vþm. 1; þann inn aldna jötun, Fm. 29; þann inn hrímkalda jötun, 38; þess ins alsvinna jötuns, Vþm. 5; þat it unga man, Alm. 6; þann inn aldna jötun, Gm. 50; þau in harðmóðgu ský, 41; sá inn máttki munr, 93; mönnum þeim enum aldrœnum, Hbl. 44; börn þau in blíðu, Og. 9; hrís þat ið mæra, Akv. 5: in prose, fjölmenni þat it mikla, Eg. 46; þetta it mikla skip, Fms. x. 347, passim: with ordinals, segðu þat ið eina, say that the first, Vþm. 20; þat ið þriðja, fjórða …, 20 sqq.
    2. after a possessive; síns ins heila hugar, síns ins svára sefa, Hm. 105; þíns ins hvassa hjörs, Fm. 29; minn inn hvassi hjörr, 6; míns ins hvassa hjörs, 28; bækr þínar inar bláhvítu, Hðm.
    3. after a pers. pron.: þú hinn armi, thou wretch! Ld. 326; gakk þú hingat hinn mikli maðr! Eg. 488.
    III. placed between two nouns in apposition:
    1. between a proper name and a title or epithet in the definite form; Sigurðr inn Suðræni, Sigurd the Southerner, Skv. 3. 4; Atli inn Ríki, Akv. 29; Högna ins frækna, Hjalla ins blauða, 23; Guðröðr inn Göfugláti, Ýt.; Hamðir inn hugumstóri, Hðm. 25; Kjötva’nn (= Kjötva enn) Auðga, Hornklofi; Svan enum Rauða, Álfr enn Gamli, Hdl.; as also in prose, Ívarr inn Víðfaðmi, Haraldr enn Hárfagri, Ólafr inn Digri, Knútr inn Fundni, Auðr in Djúpauðga, Þorbjörg in Digra, Hildr in Mjófa, Steinólfr inn Lági, Þorkell inn Hávi, Kjarlakr inn Gamli, Björn inn Austræni, Ólafr inn Hvíti, Hálfdan inn Svarti, Sighvatr inn Rauði, Kyjólfr inn Grá, Gestr inn Spaki; Ari inn Fróði (Aren Froðe contr. = Are enn Froðe, Ó. T. 23, line 1), Ketill inn Heimski, Knútr inn Ríki, Eadvarðr inn Góði, Hálfdan inn Mildi, Ingjaldr inn Illráði, Helgi inn Magri, Úlfr inn Skjálgi, Landn., Fb. iii; cp. Gr. Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων, Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος, Germ. Nathan der Weise, Engl. Alfred the Great, etc.: of ships, Ormr inn Langi, Ormr inn Skammi.
    2. between an appellative and an adjective; sveinn inn hvíti, Ls. 20; hendi inni hægri, 61; þengill inn meins-vani, Gm. 16; seggr inn ungi, Skm. 2; skati inn ungi, Hdl. 9; brúðr in kappsvinna, Am. 75; hest inn hraðfæra, Gh. 18; varr inn vígfrækni, gumi inn gunnhelgi, Hðm. 30; auð inn fagra, Skv. 1. 13; orm inn frána, 1, 11; fjánda inn fólkská, Fm. 37; konungr inn Húnski, Skv. 3. 8, 18, 63, 64; orð ið fyrra, Og. 9; mál ið efsta, 16; seggr inn suðræni, Akv. 3; seggr inn æri, 6; mar’inum mélgreypa, 3, 13; borg inni há, 14; sól inni suðrhöllu, 30; veðrs ens mikla, Hkv. 1. 12; handar ennar hægri, Ls. 38, 61; vífs ins vegliga, Am. 54; konung inn kostsama, Hkm.; gramr inn glaðværi, id.; hlut inn mjóvara, Ýt. 13; konungr inn kynstóri, fylkir inn framlyndi, hilmi’nom hálsdigra, konu’na Dönsku, hverr’ enni Heinversku, Hornklofi, Sæm. (Möb.) 228–231; við arm inn vestra, Sighvat; so also in prose passim.
    B. When there was no adjective the article became a suffix to the noun (see Gramm. pp. xix, xx), a usage common even in early prose, but extremely rare in poetry; the reason is, not that the poems were composed before the suffixed article had come into use, but that the metres themselves in which all the old poems were composed are older than that usage, and are not well adapted to it, so that the absence of the article became traditional. The old poem Harbarðsljóð makes an exception, no doubt not from being later than all other poems, but from being composed in a peculiar metre, half verse and half prose; thus in that single poem alone there are nearly twenty instances, or about twice or thrice as many as in all the other poems together:—váginn, Hbl. 2, 13, 15; sundit, 1, 3, 8, 13; verðinum, 4; eikjunni, 7; skipit, id.; stöðna, landit, id.; leiðina, 55; höfuðit, 15; bátinum, 53; veggsins, stokksins, steinsins, 56; matrinn, 3: other solitary instances are, goðin öll, Vsp. 27 (prob. somewhat corrupt); eiki-köstinn, Gh. 20; vömmin vár, Ls. 52.
    II. in prose, old and modern, the suffixed article occurs at every step; only one or two instances are worth noticing as peculiar to the Icelandic:
    1. as vocative in addressing; konan, O woman! mjöðnannan, id., Sighvat (in a verse of A. D. 1018, and so in mod. usage); elskan! hjartað! heillin! ástin, my love! dear! heart! þursinn! Fas. i. 385; hundarnir! = ω κύνες, Od. xxii. 35: also with another word, barnið gott, good child! Þrúðnaþussinn, thou monster giant! Miðgarðs-ormrinn! Fas. i. 373.
    2. esp. if with a possessive adjective following, as in Gr. οὑμός, τοὐμόν, τἀμά, etc.; elskan mín, ástin mín, hjartað mitt, góðrinn minn! hér er nú ástin mín, here is my darling! Sturl. ii. 78, of a father presenting a darling child to a friend; and so in mod. usage: as abuse, hundrinn þinn, thou dog! Ísl. ii. 176; þjófrinn þinn! Fms. vii. 127; dyðrillinn þinn! ii. 279; hundinum þínum! vi. 323: this use is not confined to the vocative, e. g. konan mín biðr að heilsa, my wife (kona mín is never used); maðrinn minn, my husband; biddu foreldrana þína ( ask thy parents) að lofa þér að fara; augun hans, his eyes, Pass. 24. 4; hugrinn vor og hjartað sé, our mind and heart (cp. Gr. τω ἐμω θυμω), 43. 5; svo hjartað bæði og málið mitt | mikli samhuga nafnið þitt, 10. 7; gef þú að móður-málið mitt, 35. 9; bókin mín, my favourite book, my own book; as also, fáðu mér hattinn minn, vetlingana mína, skóna mína, give me my hat, gloves, shoes; tungan í þér, augun í þér, thy tongue, thy eyes; höfuðið á mér, fætrnir á mér, my head, my feet; hendrnar á þér (‘á mér, á þér’ are here equivalent to a possessive, see p. 37, C. IV), thy hands, cp. Homer, τα σα γούνατα; hestana þína, Gr. ϊππους τους σούς: similar is the instance, vömmin vár, the sins of ours, Ls. 52; this may be a remnant of a time when the article was used separately, even with an indefinite adjective.
    3. a double article, one suffixed to the noun and the other prefixed to the word in apposition; hirðin sú in Danska, Fms. vi. 323; þau in stóru skipin, viii. 384 and passim: again, when a noun is put in the genitive after another noun the former has no article; as the Engl. phrase ‘the fish of the sea and the fowl of the air’ is in Icel. ‘fiskar sjávarins og fuglar loptsins:’ but this belongs to the syntax; see also Grimm’s D. G. iv. 432.
    C. SPECIAL CHANGES, in mod. usage:
    I. the demonstr. pron. sá, sú, það has in speech generally taken the place of inn, in, it; thus, sá gamli maðr, sú gamla kona, það gamla skáld; sometimes the article is dropped altogether, e. g. á fimta degi, on the fifth day (= á enum fimta degi); á sömn stundu, in the same hour; even in old writers this is found, með sömu ætlan, Bs. i. 289; á níundu tíð dags, Stj. 41, (but rarely); yet the old form is often retained in writing.
    II. in case A. II. the article may be dropped; þann gamla maim, þá gömlu konu, það gamla skáld, þú armi, etc.; sá ráða-góði, sú goðum-líki, sá ágæti Odysseifr, sú vitra Penelopa, sá Jarðkringjandi Pósídon, Od. passim (in Dr. Egilsson’s translation).
    III. in case A. III. 1. the article is also dropped, Knútr Ríki, Haraldr Hárfagri; even old writers (esp. in later vellums) omitted it now and then, Hálfdan Svarta, Fms. i. 1; Haraldr Grænski, 90; Haraldr Hárfagri, 192; Óttarr ungi, Hdl.: even in the Sæm. Cod. Reg., Völsungr ungi, Skv. 3. 1, 3.
    IV. in case A. III. 2. the pronouns sá, sú, það, and hinn, hin, hit may be used indiscriminately, although the former is more usual.
    V. lastly, in case B. the suffixed article has gained ground, and is in modern prose used more freq. than in ancient.
    ☞ CONCLUSION.—The old poetical language, with the sole exception of a single poem, had no article in the modern and proper sense; in every instance the ‘inn, in, it’ bears the character of a demonstrative pronoun, preceding an adjective and enhancing and emphasising its sense, like the pers. pron. hann, q. v.; but it is never attached to a single substantive; when the adjective was placed in apposition after a noun, the pronoun came to stand as an enclitic just after the noun, and was sounded as if suffixed thereto; at last it was tacked as an actual suffix to single nouns standing without apposition, and thus the true suffixed article gradually arose, first in speech, then in writing; whereas at the same time the old pronominal enclitic (A. I-III) gradually went out of use, and was either dropped or replaced by the stronger demonstrative pronoun ‘sá, sú.’
    2.
    HIN, HITT, demonstr. pron., prob. identical in etymology with the preceding word, from which it is however distinguished,
    1. by the neut. hitt, Dan. hint;
    2. by the initial aspirate, which is never dropped;
    3. by being a fully accentuated pronoun, so that the h can stand as an alliterative letter, e. g. handar ennar hægri | mun ek hinnar geta, Ls.; veitkat ek hitt hvart Heita | hungr …, Hallfred; Hitt kvað þá Hamðir, etc., Hom. 23, 25, Korm. 40; Raun er hins at Heinir | hræ …; Skáld biðr hins at haldi | hjálm …, Sighvat, Hkv. Hjörv. 26: [Ulf. jains = ἐκεινος; A. S. geond; Engl. yon; Germ. jener.]
    A. This pronoun is used,
    I. in a demonstr. sense, emphatically and without being opp. to a preceding demonstr.; raun er hins at …, it is proved that …; skáld biðr hins, at …, Sighvat; veitkat ek hitt hvat (hvárt) …, Hallfred; hitt ek hugða, emphatically, that was what I thought, I thought forsooth, Hm. 98; hitt kvað pá Hróðrglóð, Hðm. 13; hitt kvað þá Hamðir, 25; hitt vil ek vita, that I want to know, Vþm. 3, 6; þó ek hins get, ef …, yet I guess, that if …, Skm. 24; vita skal hitt, ef …, Korm. 40 (in a verse), Ísl. ii. 225 (in a verse); hitt var fyrr = in former times, formerly, Ýt., Fs. 94 (in a verse); hinn er sæll, er …, he is happy, that …, Hm. 8; maðr hinn er …, ‘man he that’ = the man who, 26; hinn er Surts ór Sökkdölum, Edda 51 (in a verse); veitat hinn er tin tannar, hinn er um eyki annask, Kormak (in a verse); handar innar hægri mun ek hinnar geta, er …, the right hand, that hand namely, which …, Ls. 38; this usage scarcely occurs except in old poetry.
    II. demonstr. referring to another pronoun, denoting the former, farther, the other, = Dan. hiin, hint, Germ. jener, cp. Gr. ἐκεινος, Lat. ille; freq. in prose, old and mod.; fóru þeir með þau skip er þeim þóttu bezt en brenndu hin, Fms. v. 8; Kimbi bar sár sitt engan mun betr en hinir, er hann hafði áðr á fært, 92; en hitt er meira, at hann lætr sér annarra manna fé jafnheimilt, Eg. 47; kemr örvar-oddrinn í strenglag hinnar örvarinnar, Fb. iii. 405; er þú hefir mik fyrir lagt á hinu áðr, 407; hinir frændr þínir, ii. 425; á hinn fótinn, on that, the other leg, Nj. 97; þat er válítið, … hitt er undr …, Ls. 33; hinir hlaða seglunum ok bíða, Fms. x. 347; ef hinn ( the other part) er eigi þar við staddr, Grág. i. 52; hvárt hinn ( the other one) hefir jafnmikit fé hins ( of the other one) er austr er, 220; rétt er at kveðja frá hennar heimili ef hann veit hvártki hinna (gen. pl.), 339; ok vill annarr hluta en annarr eigi … ok verðr sem hinn mæli ekki um er eigi vill hluta, 393; ef maðr sendir annan mann til eindaga, ok erat hinn skyldr við at taka, id.; þess á milli er hón fór at sofa á kveldit, ok hins er hón var klædd, Ld. 14; ærit fögr er mær sjá, … en hitt veit ek eigi hvaðan þjófs-augu eru komin í ættir várar, forsooth she is a beautiful girl, but yet I know not, Nj. 2:—demonstr. in the sense of this (but rare), stjörnur þær er nær eru leiðar-stjöruu ganga aldri undir með oss, en í Blálandi eðr Arabia ganga hinar stjörnur, these very stars, Rb. 468: phrases, hitt ok annat, this and the other, Rd. 235; mod. hitt og þetta.
    B. COMPOUND FORMS, hinn-ug, hinn-og, or hins-ig, mod. hins-egin, also hizig, q. v. [from vegr], adv. the other way; þótt Gísl þykki hinsig (hinn veg, v. l.) eigi síðr til vísa, Fms. vii. 46; hinnig værir þú undir brún at líta sem …, Nj. 55: locally, there, in the other place, illic, ok láta bera vætti þat hinneg var nefnt, Grág. i. 90; heimta af erfingja ef hinnig er eigi til, K. Þ. K. 28; brenndi þar ok görði hervirki eigi minna enn hinneg, Fms. vi. 340; ef hinnig mundi kostr, K. Þ. K. 24; eigi er hægra undir þeim at búa fyrir kulda sakir, enn hinnog er fyrir ofrhita sakir, Sks. 196; því at hón er kaldari hér en hizug, 70: temp. the other day, formerly (rare), er ek hinnig mælta, Og. 11.
    2. denoting motion, hither, thither; hinnig deyja ór Helju halir, Vþm. 43; renna hinnig, Gh. 18; ríða hinig, Fm. 26: koma hinig, Gs. 18.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > HINN

  • 6 τε

    τε, enclitic Particle, with two main uses (v. infr. A, B).
    A as a Conjunction,
    I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second,

    ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544

    ;

    ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε Hes.Op. 669

    ;

    δίψῃ τε λιμῷ τε A.Pers. 491

    , cf. S.Aj.34,35, Ar.Ach. 370, 375;

    τήν τε νῆσον τήν τε ἤπειρον Th.4.8

    , cf. Antipho 2.3.3, Pl. R. 373b;

    λυσόμενός τε θύγατρα, φέρων τ' ἀπερείσι' ἄποινα Il.1.13

    ; παῖδά τε σοὶ ἀγέμεν Φοίβῳ θ' ἱερὴν ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ib. 443; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usu. short in Hom., longer in later Gr., e.g.

    ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται IG12.103.7

    ;

    ἥ τε γὰρ γῆ.. εὔυδρός ἐστι, ποταμοί τε δι' αὐτῆς ῥέουσι Hdt.4.47

    ; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. Th.4.92, cf. Pl.R. 474c, X.Cyr.1.4.25, Is.1.50; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ' ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ' ἀδικήσαντες κατ' ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen. Tact.16.8, cf. Gp.2.49.1, 12.3.2-3;

    τούτου γὰρ γενομένου.. τά τε ἐχφόρια Χρυσέρμῳ δυνήσομαι ἀποδοῦναι, ἐγώ τε ἔσομαι παρὰ σοῦ φιλανθρωπίας τετευχώς PEnteux.60.11

     (iii B.C.);

    κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι Gal.16.494

    , cf. 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (qq.v.); τε may be used three or more times,

    ἔν τ' ἄρα οἱ φῦ χειρί, ἔπος τ' ἔφατ' ἔκ τ' ὀνόμαζεν Od.15.530

    , cf. Il.1.177, 2.58, A.Pr. 89sq., B.17.19sq., Lys. 19.17, X.Cyr.3.3.36:— ἑνδεκάτη τε δυωδεκάτη τε prob. means the eleventh or twelfth, Od.2.374, 4.588:—sts. τε.. τε couples alternatives,

    ἀπόρως εἶχε δοῦναί τε μὴ δοῦναί τε E.IA56

    , cf. Heracl. 153, El. 391; hence we find τε.. ἢ.., Pl.Tht. 143c, Ion 535d; on ἢ (or ἦ) .. τε in Il.2.289 and A.Eu. 524 (lyr.) v. ἦ 1.3.
    2 the first clause may be negative, the second affirmative, as

    ἐκκλησίαν τε οὐκ ἐποίει.., τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε Th.2.22

    ; but οὔτε.. τε is more freq., as

    οὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχύς.., γιγνώσκω τε X.Cyr.2.3.6

     (v.

    οὔτε 11.4

    ); we also find οὐ.. τε.. , as

    οὐχ ἡσύχαζον.., παρεκάλουν τε τοὺς ξυμμάχους Th.1.67

    ; and μὴ.. τε.. , as ἵνα μή τι διαφύγῃ ἡμᾶς, εἴ τέ τι βούλει κτλ. Pl.Phd. 95e.
    3 τε ( both) sts. corresponds to a following δέ ( and), or τε ( and) to a preceding μέν, e.g.
    a τε.. δὲ.. , as

    κόμισαί τέ με, δὸς δέ μοι ἵππους Il.5.359

    , cf. 7.418, S.OC 367, Tr. 285, E.Ph. 1625;

    ἐσθὰς ἀμφότερόν νιν ἔχεν, ἅ τε.. ἐπιχώριος.., ἀμφὶ δὲ παρδαλέᾳ στέγετο Pi.P.4.80

    ;

    διήκουέ τε.., ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἐπῄνεσε X.Cyr.4.4.3

    ; so with ἅμα δὲ καὶ.., ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ.., Th.1.25, Pl.Smp. 186e:—so τε.., ἀτὰρ οὖν καὶ.., Id.Hp.Ma. 295e.
    b

    μὲν.. τε.., ἄνδρα μὲν.., τρεῖς τε κασιγνήτους Il.19.291

    -3, cf. Od.22.475-6, Pi.O.6.88, 7.88, A.Th. 924, Ch. 585 (lyr.), S.Ant. 963 (lyr.), E.Heracl. 337 codd., Cyc.41 (lyr.), Ar.Nu. 563(lyr.), Pl.Phdr. 266c, Lg. 927b: v. μέν A. 11.6c.
    4 a single τε ( and) joins a word, phrase, or (esp. later) clause or sentence to what precedes,

    τελευτὴν κεφαλήν τε Pl.Ti. 69a

    ; θνητὰ ἀθάνατά τε ib.c;

    Ζεῦ ἄλλοι τε θεοί Il.6.476

    ;

    κύνεσσιν οἰωνοῖσί τε πᾶσι 1.5

    ; ῥίγησέν τ' ἂρ ἔπειτα ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Ἀγαμέμνων v.l. for δ' ἂρ in 11.254; ἕν τε οὐδὲν κατέστη ἴαμα.., σῶμά τε αὔταρκες ὂν οὐδὲν διεφάνη.., Th.2.51; τά τε ἱερὰ.. νεκρῶν πλέα ἦν.. ib.52; νόμοι τε πάντες ξυνεταράχθησαν ibid.;

    δάκνει σ' ἀδελφὸς ὅ τε θανὼν ἴσως πατήρ E.El. 242

    , cf. 253, 262, al.;

    εἴς τε τὰς ἄλλας.. ἀθροίζεσθαι Aen.Tact.3.5

    ; τῶν τε ἀρχόντων.. ib.6, cf. 10.8, al.;

    ὅ τε γραφεὶς κύκλος.. Archim.Spir.11

     Def.7;

    πρός τε τούτοις φησὶν.. PEnteux.63.18

     (iii B.C.);

    χωρίς τε τούτων Plb.2.56.13

    , 61.1, 3.17.7;

    ταῦτά τ' ἐγίνετο.. Id.2.43.6

    , cf. 3.70.4;

    ἀπαιτούμενός τε ὑπ' ἐμοῦ τὰ ἔρια οὐκ ἀποδίδωσί PEnteux.2.6

    , cf. 8.4, al. (iii B.C.); γράψαι Ἀγαθοκλεῖ τῷ ἐπιστάτῃ διασαφῆσαί τε αὐτῷ ib.81.21 (iii B.C.);

    καθόλου τε.. Arr.Epict.1.19.13

    , cf. 2.2.17;

    ἀταράχους τήν τε δύναμιν ἀκαθαιρέτους Sor.1.21

    , cf. 24, al.;

    ὄξει βαφικῷ στυπτηρίᾳ τε PHolm. 1.4

    , cf. Gem.16.6;

    χρὴ.. λαχάνων ἅπτεσθαι, κοιλίαν τε λύειν Gp.1.12.19

    , cf. 2.2.2, al.; this τε may be used any number of times, Od.4.149- 150, 14.75, 158-9, Men.Pk.15,16,20, Hipparch.1.9.8, Act.Ap.2.43,46, 4.13, 14, al.
    II τε.. καὶ.. , or τε καὶ.. , both.. and.., where τε points forward to καί, and usu. need not be translated, e.g.

    Ἀτρείδης τε ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν καὶ δῖος Ἀχιλλεύς Il.1.7

    ; εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε δαμᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς ib.61; δειλός τε καὶ οὐτιδανὸς καλεοίμην ib. 293;

    ζωόν τε καὶ ἀρτεμέα 7.308

    , cf. 327, 338, al.;

    τῆς τε γῆς ἐούσης ἐπιτηδέης καὶ τῶν ποταμῶν ἐόντων σφι συμμάχων Hdt.4.47

    ;

    βούλεταί τε καὶ ἐπίσταται Th.2.35

    ;

    ὁ φύς τε καὶ τραφείς Pl.R. 396c

    ;

    βάσιν τε γὰρ πάλιν τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχουσι τὴν ΖΒ καὶ.. Euc.1.47

    ; sts. the elements joined by τε.. καὶ.. are joined in order to be compared or contrasted rather than simply joined,

    κάκιστος νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι δοκεῖ S.Ant. 181

    ;

    μεσαμβρίη τέ ἐστι καὶ τὸ κάρτα γίνεται ψυχρόν Hdt.4.181

    ;

    ἔτυχόν τε ὕσταται ἐξαναχθεῖσαι καί κως κατεῖδον Id.7.194

    ; ἐπαύσατό τε ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ τὸ κῦμα ἔστρωτο ib. 193;

    ταὐτὰ.. νῦν τε καὶ τότε Ar.Av. 24

    ;

    χωρὶς τό τ' εἰπεῖν πολλὰ καὶ τὰ καίρια S.OC 808

    ;

    ὅσον τό τ' ἄρχειν καὶ τὸ δουλεύειν δίχα A.Pr. 927

    ; sts. (like τε.. τε) even used of alternatives,

    διάνδιχα μερμήριξεν, ἵππους τε στρέψαι καὶ ἐναντίβιον μαχέσασθαι Il.8.168

    ;

    ἐν δίκᾳ τε καὶ παρὰ δίκαν Pi.O.2.16

    ;

    θεοῦ τε.. θέλοντος καὶ μὴ θέλοντος A.Th. 427

    ;

    πείσας τε.. καὶ μὴ τυχών Th.3.42

    :—on οἵ τε ἄλλοι καὶ.. , e.g.

    τοῖς τε ἄλλοις ἅπασι καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις Isoc.12.249

    , and ἄλλως τε καὶ.. , v. ἄλλος 11.6,

    ἄλλως 1.3

    .
    2 in this sense τ' ἠδέ is only [dialect] Ep.,

    σκῆπτρόν τ' ἠδὲ θέμιστας Il.9.99

    , cf. 1.400, al.; also

    τε.., ἰδέ, χαλκόν τε ἰδὲ λόφον 6.469

    , cf. 8.162.
    3 καὶ.. τε, both.. and.., is occasionally found, as καὶ μητέρα πατέρα τ' E.Alc. 646.
    b καὶ.. τε perh. means and.. also in

    καὶ ναυτικῷ τε ἅμα Th.1.9

    ;

    καὶ πρός τε τοὺς Ῥηγίνους Id.6.44

    ;

    καὶ αὐτός τε Id.8.68

    ; v. infr. c. 10.
    4 τε.. τε or τε.. καὶ.. sts. join elements which are not syntactically parallel, esp. a part. and a finite verb, ἰοῖσίν τε τιτυσκόμενοι λάεσσί τ' ἔβαλλον (for βάλλοντες) Il.3.80;

    ἄλλα τε ἐπιφραζόμενος καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐπεπόμφεε Hdt.1.85

    ;

    ἀλλῳ τε τρόπῳ πειράζοντες καὶ μηχανὴν προσήγαγον Th.4.100

    ;

    τῆς τε ὥρας.. ταύτης οὔσης.., καὶ τὸ χωρίον.. χαλεπὸν ἦν Id.7.47

    , cf. 4.85, 8.81, 95.
    5 the copulative τε becomes rare in later Gr.; it is found about 340 times in LXX, mostly in the Pentateuch and 1-4 Ma., only 3 times in Ps.; in the NT it is found about 150 times in Act.Ap., 20 times in Ep.Hebr., and very rarely in the other books.
    B In [dialect] Ep. (more rarely in other dactylic verse, v. infr. 11) τε stands in general or frequentative statements or in statements of what is well known; such statements are freq. made as justifications of a preceding particular statement or of a preceding exhortation to a particular person or persons; the sense of τε thus approaches that of τοι (cf. τοι and τε in Od.2.276-7, and cf. Il.13.115 with 15.203); although associated with numerous particles and other words of particular types (v. infr.) its meaning remains independent of these and applies to the whole sentence in which it stands:

    αἶψά τε φυλόπιδος πέλεται κόρος ἀνθρώποισιν Il.19.221

    ;

    οὐ γάρ τ' αἶψα θεῶν τρέπεται νόος αἰὲν ἐόντων Od.3.147

    ;

    θεοὶ δέ τε πάντα ἴσασιν 4.379

    , cf. 5.79, 447, 10.306, 17.485, Il.9.497, 16.688, 17.176, 21.264;

    ξυνὸς Ἐνυάλιος καί τε κτανέοντα κατέκτα 18.309

    , cf. Od.11.537, Il.24.526;

    ἤ τ' ἔβλητ' ἤ τ' ἔβαλ' ἄλλον 11.410

    ;

    οὐ μὲν γάρ τε κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392

    ;

    οἳ φύλλοισιν ἐοικότες ἄλλοτε μέν τε ζαφλεγέες τελέθουσιν.. ἄλλοτε δὲ.. Il.21.464

    ;

    ἄλλος γάρ τ' ἄλλοισιν ἀνὴρ ἐπιτέρπεται ἔργοις Od.14.228

    , cf. 8.169, 170, 15.400; τοῦ γάρ τε ξεῖνος μιμνήσκεται ἤματα πάντα, ἀνδρὸς ξεινοδόκου, ὅς κεν φιλότητα παράσχῃ ib.54, cf. 17.322;

    ῥεχθὲν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Il.17.32

    ;

    παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Hes.Op. 218

    ;

    αἰεὶ γάρ τε νεώτεροι ἀφραδέουσιν Od. 7.294

    ; δύσζηλοι γάρ τ' εἰμὲν ἐπὶ χθονὶ φῦλ' ἀνθρώπων ib. 307;

    τοῦ δέ τε πολλοὶ ἐπαυρίσκοντ' ἄνθρωποι, καί τε πολέας ἐσάωσε Il.13.733

    -4; τοῦ μὲν γάρ τε κακοῦ τρέπεται χρὼς ἄλλυδις ἄλλῃ, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη στέρνοισι πατάσσει.., πάταγος δέ τε γίγνετ' ὀδόντων ib. 279-83;

    ὀλίγη δέ τ' ἀνάπνευσις πολέμοιο 18.201

    ;

    νέῳ δέ τε πάντ' ἐπέοικεν.. κεῖσθαι 22.71

    ;

    κατέλεξεν ἅπαντα κήδε' ὅσ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλει, τῶν ἄστυ ἁλώῃ· ἄνδρας μὲν κτείνουσι, πόλιν δέ τε πῦρ ἀμαθύνει, τέκνα δέ τ' ἄλλοι ἄγουσι, βαθυζώνους τε γυναῖκας 9.592

    -4, cf. 22.492, 495, 499;

    νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδέν· καὶ γάρ τίς τ' ἀλλοῖον ὀδύρεται ἄνδρ' ὀλέσασα.. ἢ Ὀδυσῆ' Od.19.265

    ;

    σχέτλιε, καὶ μέν τίς τε χερείονι πείθεθ' ἑταίρῳ.., αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ θεός εἰμι 20.45

    , cf. 23.118, Il.2.292, 9.632; νῦν δὲ μνησώμεθα δόρπου· καὶ γάρ τ' ἠΰκομος Νιόβη ἐμνήσατο σίτου κτλ. 24.602 (where a general inference is implied);

    ὃν Βριάρεων καλέουσι θεοί, ἄνδρες δέ τε πάντες Αἰγαίων' 1.403

    , cf. 2.814, 5.306, 10.258, 14.290; sts. of repeated action by particular persons,

    ἄλλοτε μέν τε γόῳ φρένα τέρπομαι Od.4.102

    ;

    οὐ μὰ γὰρ Ἀπόλλωνα Διὶ φίλον, ᾧ τε σύ, Κάλχαν, εὐχόμενος.. θεοπροπίας ἀναφαίνεις Il.1.86

    ; ἡ δὲ.. μ' αἰεὶ.. νεικεῖ, καί τέ μέ φησι μάχῃ Τρώεσσιν ἀρήγειν ib. 521;

    μήτηρ γάρ τέ μέ φησι θεά, Θέτις ἀργυρόπεζα, διχθαδίας κῆρας φερέμεν θανάτοιο τέλοσδε 9.410

    .
    2 in exhortations addressed to an individual, a subsidiary sentence or relative clause in which he is reminded of his special or characteristic sphere of activity is marked by τε, e.g.

    Ἑρμεία, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε φίλτατόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ ἑταιρίσσαι καί τ' ἔκλυες ᾧ κ' ἐθέλῃσθα, βάσκ' ἴθι.. Il.24.334

    ;

    Ἀτρεΐδη, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε λαὸς Ἀχαιῶν πείσονται μύθοισι.., νῦν δ' ἀπὸ πυρκαϊῆς σκέδασον.. 23.156

    ;

    δεῦρο δὴ ὄρσο, γρηῢ.., ἥ τε γυναικῶν δμῳάων σκοπός ἐσσι.., ἔρχεο Od. 22.395

    , cf. Il.17.249.
    3 similarly in general and frequentative statements consisting of two clauses (one of which may be a relative clause, freq. containing the subj. or opt.), in which the fulfilment of the condition stated in the subsidiary or subordinate clause is declared to be generally or always followed by the result stated in the principal clause, either or both clauses may contain τε:
    a the principal clause alone contains τε

    , ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ' ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ Il.1.218

    ;

    ὃς δ' ἂν ἀμύμων αὐτὸς ἔῃ καὶ ἀμύμονα εἰδῇ, τοῦ μέν τε κλέος εὐρὺ διὰ ξεῖνοι φορέουσι πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους, πολλοί τέ μιν ἐσθλὸν ἔειπον Od.19.333

    ;

    εἴ περ γὰρ θυμῷ γε μενοινάᾳ πολεμίζειν, ἀλλά τε λάθρῃ γυῖα βαρύνεται.., βλάβεται δέ τε γούνατ' ἰόντι Il.19.165

    -6;

    ᾧ μέν κ' ἀμμείξας δώῃ Ζεὺς τερπικέραυνος, ἄλλοτε μέν τε κακῷ ὅ γε κύρεται ἄλλοτε δ' ἐσθλῷ 24.530

    .
    b the subordinate clause alone contains τε

    , λάζετο δ' ἔγχος.. τῷ δάμνησι στίχας ἀνδρῶν ἡρώων οἷσίν τε κοτέσσεται ὀβριμοπάτρη 5.747

    ;

    ῥεῖα δ' ἀρίγνωτος γόνος ἀνέρος ᾧ τε Κρονίων ὄλβον ἐπικλώση Od.4.207

    ;

    ἀντί νυ πολλῶν λαῶν ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ὅν τε Ζεὺς κῆρι φιλήσῃ Il.9.117

    , cf. 7.298, Od.6.287, 7.74, 8.547, 18.276; with opt.,

    ἀλλὰ πολὺ πρώτιστος.. ἕλεσκον ἀνδρῶν δυσμενέων ὅ τέ μοι εἴξειε πόδεσσι 14.221

    : it is prob. that τε has been replaced by κε in the text of Hom. in Il.1.218, 9.510 (cf. 508), and some other passages in which κε seems to be used, exceptionally, in general relative clauses.
    c both clauses contain τε

    , ὃς μέν τ' αἰδέσεται κούρας Διὸς ἆσσον ἰούσας, τὸν δὲ μέγ' ὤνησαν καί τ' ἔκλυον εὐχομένοιο Il.9.508

    -9;

    εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον γε καὶ αὐτῆμαρ καταπέψῃ, ἀλλά τε καὶ μετόπισθεν ἔχει κότον 1.82

    -3.
    4 in the subordinate clause of a collective sentence, in which the principal clause states something to be true of all those (i.e. each individual) to whom the predicate of the subordinate clause applies,

    ὑπόσχωμαι.. κτήματα.. πάντα μάλ' ὅσσα τ' Ἀλέξανδρος.. ἠγάγετο Τροίηνδ'.. δωσέμεν Il.22.115

    ;

    πάντων ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει τε καὶ ἕρπει 17.447

    , cf. Od.18.131, Il.19.105;

    βάλλειν ἄγρια πάντα τά τε τρέφει οὔρεσιν ὕλη 5.52

    , cf. 18.485.
    5 in relative clauses (and in parenthetic principal clauses) which indicate what is customary, ἐπεὶ οὐχ ἱερήϊον οὐδὲ βοείην ἀρνύσθην, ἅ τε ποσσὶν ἀέθλια γίγνεται ἀνδρῶν which are the usual prizes.., Il.22.160;

    ἔργ' ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, τά τε κλείουσιν ἀοιδοί Od.1.338

    , cf. 3.435, 4.85, 13.410, 14.226, 17.423, Il.5.332;

    κύματος ἐξαναδύς, τά τ' ἐρεύγεται ἤπειρόνδε Od.5.438

    ;

    μολπή τ' ὀρχηστύς τε, τὰ γάρ τ' ἀναθήματα δαιτός 1.152

    : similarly in clauses with

    οἷά τε (πολλά), κῆτος ἐπισσεύῃ μέγα δαίμων ἐξ ἁλός, οἷά τε πολλὰ τρέφει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη 5.422

    ;

    οὐ γάρ σ' οὐδέ.. δαήμονι φωτὶ ἐΐσκω ἄθλων, οἷά τε πολλὰ μετ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλονται 8.160

    , cf. 11.364, 14.63, 15.324, 379.
    6 in relative clauses indicating what is true of all persons or things denoted by the same word, οὐ γάρ τις νήσων ἱππήλατος οὐδ' εὐλείμων αἵ θ' ἁλὶ κεκλίαται no one of the islands which lie in the sea (as all islands do, i.e. no island at all), Od.4.608;

    ἡμίονον.. ἥ τ' ἀλγίστη δαμάσασθαι Il.23.655

    ;

    ἐσθλὸς ἐὼν γαμβρὸς ἢ πενθερός, οἵ τε μάλιστα κήδιστοι τελέθουσι Od.8.582

    ;

    αἰετοῦ οἴματ' ἔχων.. ὅς θ' ἅμα κάρτιστός τε καὶ ὤκιστος πετεηνῶν Il.21.252

    , cf. 24.294;

    οὐδέ μιν εἰσοιχνεῦσι κυνηγέται, οἵ τε καθ' ὕλην ἄλγεα πάσχουσιν Od.9.120

    ;

    δικασπόλοι, οἵ τε θέμιστας πρὸς Διὸς εἰρύαται Il.1.238

    , cf. Od.5.67, 101, Il.1.279, 19.31, 24.415;

    οἶνός σε τρώει.., ὅς τε καὶ ἄλλους βλάπτει Od.21.293

    , cf. 14.464;

    πάρφασις, ἥ τ' ἔκλεψε νόον πύκα περ φρονεόντων Il.14.217

    ;

    οἰκωφελίη, ἥ τε τρέφει ἀγλαὰ τέκνα Od.14.223

    .
    7 when the antecedent is a definite group of gods or men, the relative clause with τε indicates an essential characteristic of the antecedent,

    Ἐρινύες, αἵ θ' ὑπὸ γαῖαν ἀνθρώπους τείνυνται Il.19.259

    ;

    Σειρῆνας.., αἵ ῥά τε πάντας ἀνθρώπους θέλγουσιν Od.12.39

    ;

    Φαίηκές μ' ἄγαγον ναυσίκλυτοι, οἵ τε καὶ ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους πέμπουσιν 16.227

    , cf. 20.187;

    νυμφάων αἵ τ' ἄλσεα καλὰ νέμονται καὶ πηγὰς ποταμῶν Il.20.8

    ;

    Λωτοφάγων, οἵ τ' ἄνθινον εἶδαρ ἔδουσι Od.9.84

    : similarly when the antecedent is an individual person (incl. god) or thing, the relative clause with τε indicates one of his or its general or essential characteristics or aspects,

    οὐ μὰ Ζῆν' ὅς τίς τε θεῶν ὕπατος καὶ ἄριστος Il.23.43

    , cf. 2.669, Od.5.4;

    Ἑρμείαο ἕκητι διακτόρου, ὅς ῥά τε πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἔργοισι χάριν καὶ κῦδος ὀπάζει 15.319

    ;

    Λάμπον καὶ Φαέθονθ', οἵ τ' Ἠῶ πῶλοι ἄγουσι 23.246

    ;

    Τειρεσίαο μάντιος ἀλαοῦ, τοῦ τε φρένες ἔμπεδοί εἰσι 10.493

    ;

    τεύχεα δύνεις ἀνδρὸς ἀριστῆος, τόν τε τρομέουσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.17.203

    , cf. 7.112; κεῖται ἀνὴρ ὅν τ' (v.l. ὃν)

    ἶσον ἐτίομεν Ἕκτορι δίῳ, Αἰνείας 5.467

    ; the relative clause sts. indicates what is customary,

    οὐδέ σε λήθω τιμῆς ἧς τέ μ' ἔοικε τετιμῆσθαι μετ' Ἀχαιοῖς 23.649

    ;

    ἔνθα δ' ἀνὴρ ἐνίαυε πελώριος, ὅς ῥά τε μῆλα οἶος ποιμαίνεσκε Od.9.187

    ;

    τῶν πάντων οὐ τόσσον ὀδύρομαι.. ὡς ἑνός, ὅς τέ μοι ὕπνον ἀπεχθαίρει καὶ ἐδωδὴν μνωομένῳ 4.105

    ;

    σῆς ἀλόχου.. ἥ τέ τοι αὔτως ἧσται ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν 13.336

    ;

    καὶ κήρυκα Μέδοντα σαώσομεν, ὅς τέ μευ αἰεὶ.. κηδέσκετο 22.357

    , cf. 346.
    8 τε is used in descriptions of particular places or things when attention is called to their peculiar or characteristic features, or their position, e.g.

    Λιβύην, ἵνα τ' ἄρνες ἄφαρ κεραοὶ τελέθουσι Od.4.85

    ;

    ἔνθα δέ τ' ὄρνιθες τανυσίπτεροι εὐνάζοντο 5.65

    , cf. 9.124, 13.99, 100, 107, 109, 244; ἓξ δέ τέ οἱ (sc. Σκύλλῃ)

    δειραὶ περιμήκεες 12.90

    , cf. 93,99, 105; ἐν δέ τε Γοργείη κεφαλή (in Athena's αἰγίς) Il.5.741; χαλεπὸν δέ τ' ὀρύσσειν ἀνδράσι γε θνητοῖσι (sc. μῶλυ) Od. 10.305;

    δοιαὶ γάρ τε πύλαι ἀμενηνῶν εἰσὶν ὀνείρων 19.562

    ; sts. τε draws attention to a well-known custom or permanent feature,

    ἀρξάμενοι τοῦ χώρου, ὅθεν τέ περ οἰνοχοεύει 21.142

    ;

    ἦ μένετε Τρῶας σχεδὸν ἐλθέμεν, ἔνθα τε νῆες εἰρύατ' εὔπρυμνοι Il.4.247

    , cf. Od. 6.266;

    ἐν ποταμῷ, ὅθι τ' ἀρδμὸς ἔην πάντεσσι βοτοῖσιν Il.18.521

    , cf. Od.14.353.
    9 a part of the anatomy is defined by a clause (containing τε) which indicates a feature which universally belongs to it,

    κατ' ἰσχίον, ἔνθα τε μηρὸς ἰσχίῳ ἐνστρέφεται Il.5.305

    , cf. 8.83, 13.547, 16.481, 20.478; similarly a point of time is defined,

    ὥρῃ ἐν εἰαρινῇ, ὅτε τ' ἤματα μακρὰ πέλονται Od.18.367

    .
    10 τε is used in relative clauses which define a measurement of a particular thing or action by reference to the measurement (in general) of some thing or action well known in daily life,

    γεφύρωσεν δὲ κέλευθον μακρὴν ἠδ' εὐρεῖαν, ὅσον τ' ἐπὶ δουρὸς ἐρωὴ γίγνεται Il.15.358

    ;

    τοῦ δ' ἤτοι κλέος ἔσται ὅσον τ' ἐπικίδναται ἠώς 7.451

    ;

    ὅτε τόσσον ἀπῆν ὅσσον τε γέγωνε βοήσας Od.9.473

    , cf. 3.321, al.; more rarely the definition is by reference to the measurement of a particular thing or action, ἤσθιε.. ἕως ὅ τ' ἀοιδὸς ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν ἄειδεν (s.v.l.) 17.358;

    ἥ τις δὴ τέτληκε τόσα φρεσίν, ὅσσα τ' ἐγώ περ 19.347

    .
    11 the freq. use of τε B in similes is to be explained under one or other of the foregoing heads, e.g. when reference is made to generally known kinds of things or natural phenomena, to human experience in daily life, or to well-known phenomena of the animal world, Il.2.456, 459, 463, 468, 470, 471, 474, 481, 3.23-5,33, 11.415-7, al.; or when universal characteristics of gods, men, animals, etc., are indicated by relative clauses introduced by ὅς τε, ὅς ῥά τε, etc., 3.61, 151, 198, al.; or by ὥς τε, ἠΰτε, ὥς τίς τε, etc., e.g. 5.136, 17.133, Od.4.535,

    ὡς εἴ τε 9.314

    , 14.254, etc.
    II in post-Hom. Gr. this use of τε is more restricted; outside of [dialect] Ep. and other early dactylic verse (Hes.Op.30, 214, 233, al., Xenoph.13.3, Thgn.148, 359, etc.) it is not found except with relatives, and with these it has scarcely any discernible sense, so that ὅς τε in Lyr. and Trag. is for the most part only = ὅς, e.g. (possibly generalizing)

    Μοῖρ', ἅ τε πατρώϊον τῶνδ' ἔχει τὸν εὔφρονα πότμον Pi.O.2.35

    , cf. 14.2, A.Eu. 1024, E.Hec. 445 (lyr.), etc. (v. ὅστε); without generalizing force, Pi.N.9.9, A.Pers. 297, Ch. 615, etc.; Hdt. has

    τά πέρ τε 1.74

    ,

    ὅκως τε 2.108

     codd., ὅσον τε (without a verb, as in Od.9.325, al.) 1.126, 2.96, 3.5, al.,

    οἷά τε 1.93

     codd. (adverbially 2.175, 5.11): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. even these uses disappear and we find only a few phrases, as ἅτε, ὥστε, ἐφ' ᾧτε, οἷός τε; in later Gr. we find exceptionally

    ἔνθεν τε Hp.Ep.17

    ;

    ἀφ' οὗ τε UPZ62.8

     (ii B.C.);

    ἀπ' οὗ τε PCair.Zen.291.3

     (iii B.C.);

    οἵ τε GDI215.23

     (Erythrae, ii B.C.); ἥ τ' PMag.Par.1.2962;

    ὅσον τε ὀκτὼ στάδια Paus.6.26.1

    ; καὶ ἔστιν ἔπη Μαντικὰ ὁπόσα τε (= which)

    ἐπελεξάμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς Id.9.31.5

    ;

    οἷόν τε καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κύων φωνῆς θεωροῦμεν S.E.M.11.28

    .
    C in Hom. τε is also (but less freq.) used in conjunction with other particles in contexts (mainly particular statements) such as the following:
    1 in assurances, statements on oath, and threats,

    σχέτλιος, ἦ τ' ἐκέλευον ἀπωσάμενον δήϊον πῦρ ἂψ ἐπὶ νῆας ἴμεν Il.18.13

    ;

    ἐξ αὖ νῦν ἔφυγες θάνατον, κύον· ἦ τέ τοι ἄγχι ἦλθε κακόν 11.362

    ; ἦ τε is similarly used in 11.391, 17.171, 236, Od.24.28, 311, al.; ἦ τ' ἄν in Il.12.69, al.; γάρ τε (s. v.l.) in

    οὐ γάρ τ' οἶδα 6.367

    , cf. Od.10.190; νύ τε in 1.60, 347 (but τ' more prob. = τοι, v. σύ) ; δέ τε in

    ἀγορῇ δέ τ' ἀμείνονές εἰσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.18.106

    ;

    σὲ δέ τ' ἐνθάδε γῦπες ἔδονται 16.836

    ; μέν τε in

    σφὼ μέν τε σαώσετε λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν 13.47

    , cf. 4.341; εἴ πέρ τε in

    οὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν γε φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης ἔσσεται, οὐδ' εἴ πέρ τε σιδήρεα δέσματ' ἔχῃσιν Od.1.204

    , cf. 188, Il.12.223, 245.
    2 also in commands, warnings, and admonitions,

    σίγα, μή τίς τ' ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν τοῦτον ἀκούσῃ μῦθον Il.14.90

    , cf. Od.19.486;

    ὣς ἄγαγ' ὡς μήτ' ἄρ τις ἴδῃ μήτ' ἄρ τε νοήσῃ Il.24.337

    ; τούσδε τ' (v.l. δ')

    ἐᾶν 16.96

     (nisi leg. τούσδ' ἔτ')

    ; δὸς δέ τέ μ' ἄνδρα ἑλεῖν 5.118

    ; μηδέ τ' ἐρώει (nisi leg. μηδ' ἔτ') 2.179, 22.185.
    3 also in passionate utterances, in clauses which indicate the cause of the speaker's passion or a circumstance which might have caused others to behave more considerately towards him,

    ὤ μοι ἐγὼ δειλή.. ἥ τ'.. τὸν μὲν.. θρέψασα.. ἐπιπροέηκα Il.18.55

    ;

    σχέτλιοί ἐστε, θεοί, ζηλήμονες ἔξοχον ἄλλων, οἵ τε θεαῖς ἀγάασθε.. ἤν τίς τε.. Od.5.119

    , 120, cf. 21.87, Il.15.468, 17.174; ἡμεῖς δ' αὖ μαχόμεσθ', οἵ πέρ τ' ἐπίκουροι ἔνειμεν and we, who ( mark you) are only allies (not γαμβροί and κασίγνητοι), are fighting, 5.477; τρεῖς γάρ τ' ἐκ Κρόνου εἰμὲν ἀδελφεοί for we, let me tell you, are three brothers, sons of Cronos (and Zeus has no prior title to power), 15.187;

    ποῖόν δε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὀδόντων δεινόν τ' ἀργαλέον τε· νεμεσσῶμαι δέ τ' ἀκούων Od.21.169

    ;

    οὐ μήν οἱ τό γε κάλλιον οὐδέ τ' ἄμεινον Il.24.52

    .
    4 in descriptions of particular events and things where there is no general reference,

    κνίση μὲν ἀνήνοθεν, ἐν δέ τε φόρμιγξ ἠπύει Od.17.270

    ; ὥς (= so)

    τέ μοι ὑβρίζοντες ὑπερφιάλως δοκέουσιν δαίνυσθαι κατὰ δῶμα 1.227

    ;

    τοὺς μέν τ' ἰητροὶ πολυφάρμακοι ἀμφιπένονται.. σὺ δ' ἀμήχανος ἔπλευ, Ἀχιλλεῦ Il.16.28

    ; πόλιν πέρι δινηθήτην καρπαλίμοισι πόδεσσι, θεοὶ δέ τε πάντες ὁρῶντο dub. l. in 22.166;

    εὗρε δ' ἐνὶ σπῆϊ γλαφυρῷ Θέτιν, ἀμφὶ δέ τ' ἄλλαι εἵαθ' ὁμηγερέες ἅλιαι θεαί 24.83

     (s.v.l.);

    ἐν δέ τε φάρμακον ἧκε Od.10.317

    ;

    νῶϊ δέ τ' ἄψορροι κίομεν Il.21.456

    ;

    πολλὰς γὰρ δὴ νύκτας.. ἄεσα καί τ' ἀνέμεινα.. Ἠῶ Od.19.342

    ;

    δέελον δ' ἐπὶ σῆμά τ' ἔθηκε Il.10.466

    ;

    ἐν δέ τε οἶνον κρητῆρσιν κερόωντο Od.20.252

    ; so with οὐδέ τ' (nisi leg. οὐδ' ἔτ')

    , τὸν καὶ ὑπέδδεισαν μάκαρες θεοὶ οὐδέ τ' ἔδησαν Il.1.406

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἔληγε μέγας θεός, ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτόν 21.248

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἄειρε 23.730

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἔασεν 11.437

    , 21.596, cf. 15.709.
    5 ὅτε τε ( when) freq. introduces a temporal clause defining a point of time in the past by means of a well-known event which occurred then, ἦ οὐ μέμνῃ ὅτε τ' ἐκρέμω ὑψόθεν; Il.15.18;

    ὅτε τε Κρόνον.. Ζεὺς γαίης νέρθε καθεῖσε 14.203

    ;

    ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τ' ἦλθον Ἀμαζόνες 3.189

     (but ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τε is general in 13.335; so also ὅτε πέρ τε.. κέρωνται in 4.259);

    ὅτε τ' ἤλυθε νόσφιν Ἀχαιῶν ἄγγελος ἐς Θήβας 5.803

    , cf. 10.286, 22.102, Od.7.323, 18.257.
    6 in ὅ τε ( that or because) the τε has no observable meaning,

    χωόμενος ὅ τ' ἄριστον Ἀχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας Il.1.244

    , cf. 412, 4.32, 6.126, Od.5.357, al.
    8 where τ' ἄρ occurs in questions, e.g. πῇ τ' ἂρ μέμονας καταδῦναι ὅμιλον; Il.13.307, cf. 1.8, 18.188, al., ταρ (q.v.) should prob. be read, since ἄρ ([etym.] α) usu. precedes a τε which is not copulative; so perh. ταρα should be read for τ' ἄρα in Od.1.346.
    9 in

    ἣ θέμις ἐστὶν.. ἤ τ' ἀνδρῶν ἤ τε γυναικῶν Il.9.276

    , it is not clear whether τε is copulative (τε A) or generalizing (τε B) or neither (τε C); ἤ is prob. = ἦ (accented as in ἤτοι (; ἤ τ' ἀλκῆς ἤ τε φόβοιο is dub. l. in 17.42; ἤ τ' = or is found in 19.148, = than in Od.16.216.
    10 Rarer and later uses;
    a also, esp. with

    ἄλλος, Ἑρμεία, σὺ γὰρ αὖτε τά τ' ἄλλα περ ἄγγελός ἐσσι Od.5.29

    , cf. 17.273, Il.23.483;

    ἐπεὶ τά τε ἄλλα πράττουσιν καλῶς, ἀναθεῖναι αὐτοὺς καὶ στήλην IG22.1298.9

    , cf. Lycurg.100 (s.v.l.);

    ἐκομισάμην τὸ παρὰ σοῦ ἐπιστόλιον, ἐν ᾧ ὑπέγραψάς μοι τήν τε παρὰ Ζήνωνος πρὸς Ἰεδδοῦν γεγραμμένην PCair.Zen.18.1

     (iii B.C.); εἰ οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει, οἵ τε λοιποί μοι τὰς χεῖρας προσοίσουσιν (- σωσιν Pap.) PPetr.2p.10 (iii B.C.);

    τῶν δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιησόντων τά τε κτήνη ὑπὸ στέρεσιν ἀχθήσεσθαι πρὸς τὰ ἐκφόρια PTeb.27.74

     (ii B.C.); v. supr. A. 11.3b.
    b with ὅδε, adding a slight emphasis to the preceding word,

    εἰ δὴ τήνδε τε γαῖαν ἀνείρεαι Od.13.238

    , cf. 15.484.
    c τε γάρ rarely = καὶ γάρ or γάρ, Arist.APo. 75b41, de An. 405a4, PA 661b28, Pol. 1318b33, 1333a2; ἐάν τε γάρ for even if, 2 Ep.Cor.10.8; τήν τε γὰρ ἐπιθυμίαν οὐκ ᾔδειν for I had not known even lust. Ep.Rom.7.7.
    D Position of τε:
    1 in signf. A, as an enclitic, it stands second word in the sentence, clause, or phrase, regardless of the meaning: ἐγγύθι τε Πριάμοιο καὶ Ἕκτορος near both Priam and Hector, Il.6.317;

    ἡμέτεραί τ' ἄλοχοι καὶ νήπια τέκνα 2.136

    , cf. 4.505, 7.295;

    αἰεί τε δὴ νηλὴς οὺ καὶ θράσους πλέως A.Pr.42

     codd., cf. 291 (anap.);

    ἄνευ τε δόλου καὶ ἀπάτης Hdt.1.69

    ;

    ὑπέρ τε σοῦ καὶ τῆς ἀδελφῆς PEnteux.6.6

     (iii B.C.);

    τοῖς τε πόνοις καὶ μαθήμασι Pl.R. 537a

    , cf. Ti. 70b; hence in E.Or. 897 πόλεος must be taken with what precedes (Porson ad loc.): but article + noun, preposition + noun are freq. regarded as forming a unity indivisible by τε

    , τοῖς κτανοῦσί τε A.Ch.41

     (lyr.);

    πρὸς βίαν τε Id.Pr. 210

    ; also the order is freq. determined by the meaning, τε being placed immediately after the word (or first word of a phrase or clause) which it joins to what precedes or to what follows,

    πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544

    ;

    ἔξω δόμων τε καὶ πάτρας A.Pr. 665

    ; the copulative or preparatory τε precedes many other particles, e.g. τε γάρ, τ' ἄρα, τέ τις.
    2 τε is enclitic in signfs. B, C also, and stands early in its sentence, clause, or phrase (v. supr.), but many particles which follow τε in signf. A precede it in signfs. B, C, e.g. in signfs. B, C we have δέ τε, μέν τε, γάρ τε, ἀλλά τε, δ' ἄρα τε, ὅς ῥά τε, οὔτ' ἄρ τε, καὶ γάρ τίς τε, ὅς τίς τε, καί τε.
    E Etymology: signf. A is found also in Skt. ca, Lat. - que; for signfs. B and c cf. Skt. ca in yá[hudot ] káś ca 'whosoever (with following verb)', Lat. - que in quisque, ubique, plerique, usque, neque, nec (= non in necopinans, etc.), Goth. ni-h 'not' (also 'and not'), Lat. namque (= nam).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τε

  • 7 εἰ

    εἰ, [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion. and Arc. (for εἰκ, v. infr. 11 ad init.), = [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol. αἰ, αἰκ (q. v.), Cypr.
    A

    ἤ Inscr.Cypr.135.10

     H., both εἰ and αἰ in [dialect] Ep.:— Particle used interjectionally with imper. and to express a wish, but usu. either in conditions, if, or in indirect questions, whether. In the former use its regular negative is μή; in the latter, οὐ.
    A INTERJECTIONALLY, in Hom., come now! c. imper.,

    εἰ δὲ.. ἄκουσον Il.9.262

    ; εἰ δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ φευγόντων ib.46; most freq. with ἄγε (q. v.), 1.302, al.
    2 in wishes, c. opt.,

    ἀλλ' εἴ τις.. καλέσειεν 10.111

    , cf. 24.74; so later,

    εἴ μοι ξυνείη μοῖρα S.OT 863

     (lyr.);

    εἴ μοι γένοιτο φθόγγος ἐν βραχίοσιν E.Hec. 836

    : more freq. folld. by

    γάρ, αἲ γὰρ δὴ οὕτως εἴη Il.4.189

    , al.;

    εἰ γὰρ γενοίμην ἀντὶ σοῦ νεκρός E.Hipp. 1410

    ;

    εἰ γὰρ γένοιτο X.Cyr.6.1.38

    ;

    εἰ γὰρ ἐν τούτῳ εἴη Pl.Prt. 310d

    ; of unattained wishes, in Hom. only c. opt.,

    εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼν.. Διὸς πάϊς αἰγιόχοιο εἴην Il.13.825

    ;

    Ζεῦ πάτερ, αἰ γὰρ ἐμὸς πόσις εἴη Alcm.29

    ; later with past tenses of ind.,

    εἰ γάρ μ' ὑπὸ γῆν.. ἧκεν A.Pr. 152

     (anap.); εἰ γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον ὥστε .. E.Alc. 1072: twice in Od. c. inf. (cf. the use of inf. in commands),

    αἰ γὰρ τοῖος ἐὼν.. ἐμὸς γαμβρὸς καλέεσθαι 7.311

    , cf. 24.376.
    b εἴθε, [dialect] Ep. αἴθε, is freq. used in wishes in the above constructions,

    εἴθε οἱ αὐτῷ Ζεὺς ἀγαθὸν τελέσειεν 2.33

    ;

    εἴθ' ὣς ἡβώοιμι Il.7.157

    ;

    ἰὼ γᾶ, εἴθ' ἔμ' ἐδέξω A.Ag. 1537

     (lyr.);

    εἴθε σοι, ὦ Περίκλεις, τότε συνεγενόμην X.Mem.1.2.46

    : later c. inf.,

    γαίης χθαμαλωτέρη εἴθε.. κεῖσθαι AP9.284

     (Crin.).
    c εἰ γάρ, εἴθε are also used with ὤφελον ([dialect] Ep. ὤφελλον), of past unattained wishes,

    αἴθ' ὤφελλες στρατοῦ ἄλλου σημαίνειν Il.14.84

    ; εἰ γὰρ ὤφελον [κατιδεῖν] Pl.R. 432c.
    d folld. by a clause expressing a consequence of the fulfilment of the wish, αἰ γὰρ τοῦτο.. ἔπος τετελεσμένον εἴη· τῷ κε τάχα γνοίης .. Od. 15.536, cf. 17.496, al.; sts. hard to distinguish from εἰ in conditions (which may be derived from this use),

    εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28

    .
    B IN CONDITIONS, if:
    I with INDIC.,
    1 with all tenses (for [tense] fut., v. infr. 2), to state a condition, with nothing implied as to its fulfilment, εἰ δ' οὕτω τοῦτ' ἐστίν, ἐμοὶ μέλλει φίλον εἶναι but if this is so, it will be.., Il.1.564: any form of the Verb may stand in apodosi,

    εἰ θεοί τι δρῶσιν αἰσχρόν, οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί E.Fr.292.7

    ;

    εἰ δοκεῖ, πλέωμεν S.Ph. 526

    ;

    εἰ Φαῖδρον ἀγνοῶ, καὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι Pl.Phdr. 228a

    ;

    κάκιστ' ἀπολοίμην, Ξανθίαν εἰ μὴ φιλῶ Ar.Ra. 579

    , cf. Od.17.475;

    εἰ θεοῦ ἦν, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερδής· εἰ δ' αἰσχροκερδής, οὐκ ἦν θεοῦ Pl.R. 408c

    ;

    εἰ ταῦτα λέγων διαφθείρω τοὺς νέους, ταῦτ' ἂν εἴη βλαβερά Id.Ap. 30b

    , cf. 25b; εἰ οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστησαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν οὐ χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε if these were right in their revolt, (it would follow that) you rule when you have no right, Th.3.40.
    b to express a general condition, if ever, whenever, sts. with [tense] pres.,

    εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται, μάταιός ἐστιν S.Tr. 943

    : with [tense] impf.,

    εἴ τίς τι ἠρώτα ἀπεκρίνοντο Th.7.10

    : rarely with [tense] aor., D.S.31.26.1, S.E.P.1.84; cf. 111.2.
    2 with [tense] fut. (much less freq. than ἐάν c. subj.), either to express a future supposition emphatically,

    εἰ φθάσομεν τοὺς πολεμίους κατακαίνοντες οὐδεὶς ἡμῶν ἀποθανεῖται X.Cyr.7.1.19

    ;

    εἰ μὴ βοηθήσετε οὐ περιέσται τἀκεῖ Th.6.91

    ; εἰ αὕτη ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται, ἔχεται ἡ πᾶσα Σικελία ibid.; in threats or warnings,

    εἰ μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν ἔσται σοι κακά E.Fr.5

    ;

    εἰ τιμωρήσεις Πατρόκλῳ, αὐτὸς ἀποθανῇ Pl.Ap. 28c

    , cf. D.28.21: or,
    b to express a present intention or expectation, αἶρε πλῆκτρον εἰ μαχεῖ if you mean to fight, Ar.Av. 759;

    ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ ἀνήρ.. εἰ ταῦτ' ἀνατεὶ τῇδε κείσεται κράτη S.Ant. 485

    , cf. Il.1.61, E.Hec. 863.
    3 with historical tenses, implying that the condition is or was unfulfilled.
    a with [tense] impf., referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in past time (in Hom. always the latter, Il.24.715, al.): ταῦτα οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ διαίτῃ μετρίᾳ ἐχρῶντο they would not be able to do this (as they do), if they did not live an abstemious life, X.Cyr.1.2.16, cf. Pl.R. 489b; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he ([place name] Agamemnon) would not have been master of islands, if he had not had also some naval force, Th.1.9;

    αἰ δ' ἦχες ἔσλων ἴμερον ἢ κάλων.. αἴδως κεν.. ἦχεν Sapph.28

    ; εἰ ἦσαν ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ.. οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα ἔπασχον if they had been good men, they would never have suffered as they did, Pl.Grg. 516e, cf. X.Mem.1.1.5; εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ τάδε ᾔδἐ.. οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε if I had known this.., Il.8.366.
    b with [tense] aor. referring to past time,

    εἰ μὴ ἔφυσε θεὸς μέλι.. ἔφασκον γλύσσονα σῦκα πέλεσθαι Xenoph.38

    ; εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα had you not come, we should be on our way.., X.An.2.1.4;

    καὶ ἴσως ἂν ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ ἀρχὴ διὰ ταχέων κατελύθη Pl.Ap. 32d

    , cf. Il.5.680, Od.4.364, D.4.5, 27.63: with [tense] plpf. in apodosi,

    εἰ τριάκοντα μόναι μετέπεσον τῶν ψήφων, ἀπεπεφεύγη ἄν Pl. Ap. 36a

    .
    c rarely with [tense] plpf. referring to action finished in past or present time, λοιπὸν δ' ἂν ἦν ἡμῖν ἔτι περὶ τῆς πόλεως διαλεχθῆναι, εἰ μὴ προτέρα τῶν ἄλλων τὴν εἰρήνην ἐπεποίητο if she had not (as she has done) made peace before the rest, Isoc.5.56, cf. Pl.Ti. 21c.
    II with SUBJ., εἰ is regularly joined with ἄν ([dialect] Ep. κε, κεν), cf. ἐάν: Arc. εἰκαν in Tegean Inscrr. of iv B. C. (IG5(2).3.16, 31, 6.2, SIG306.34) should be understood as εἰκ ἄν (εἰ: εἰκ = οὐ: οὐκ), since εἰ δ' ἄν is also found in IG5(2).3.2, 6.45, and εἰκ alone, ib.3.21; but ἄν ([etym.] κε, κεν) are freq. absent in Hom. as Od.5.221, 14.373 (and cf. infr. 2), and Lyr., Pi. (who never uses εἰ with ἄν or κε ([etym.] ν)) P.4.266, al.; in dialects,

    αἰ δείλητ' ἀγχωρεῖν IG9(1).334.6

     ([dialect] Locr., v B. C.), cf. Foed.[dialect] Dor. ap. Th.5.79; rarely in Hdt.,

    εἰ μὴ ἀναβῇ 2.13

    ; occasionally in Trag., A.Eu. 234, S.OT 198 (lyr.), etc.; very rarely in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    εἰ ξυστῶσιν αἱ πόλεις Th.6.21

    ;

    εἴ τι που ἄλσος ἢ τέμενος ἀφειμένον ᾖ Pl.Lg. 761c

    : in later Prose,

    εἴ τις θελήσῃ Apoc.11.5

    ;

    εἰ φονεύῃ Plot.2.9.9

    , cf. Procl. Inst.26.
    1 when the apodosis is [tense] fut., to express a future condition more distinctly and vividly than εἰ c. opt., but less so than εἰ c. [tense] fut. ind. (supr. 1.2a); εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἕρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' .. if thou do thus.., thou shalt know, Il.2.364, cf. 1.128, 3.281, Od.17.549;

    ἂν δέ τις ἀνθιστῆται, σὺν ὑμῖν πειρασόμεθα χειροῦσθαι X. An.7.3.11

    ; ἂν μὴ νῦν ἐθέλωμεν ἐκεῖ πολεμεῖν αὐτῷ, ἐνθάδ' ἴσως ἀναγκασθησόμεθα τοῦτο ποιεῖν if we be not now willing, D.4.50, cf. X.Cyr. 5.3.27: folld. by imper., ἢν εἰρήνης δοκῆτε δεῖσθαι, ἄνευ ὅπλων ἥκετε ib.3.2.13, cf. 5.4.30.
    2 when the apodosis is present, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition, if ever, ἤν ποτε δασμὸς ἵκηται, σοὶ τὸ γέρας πολὺ μεῖζον (sc. ἐστί) whenever a division comes, your prize is (always) greater, Il.1.166; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death come near, E.Alc. 671; with ἄν omitted,

    εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον.. καταπέψῃ ἀλλά.. ἔχει κότον Il.1.81

    .
    b with Rhet. present in apodosis, ἐὰν μὴ οἱ φιλόσοφοι βασιλεύσωσιν, οὐκ ἔστι κακῶν παῦλα there is (i.e. can be, will be) no rest.., Pl.R. 473d.
    III with OPTATIVE (never with ἄν in early Gr., later ἐάν c. opt., Dam.Pr. 114, al.),
    1 to express a future condition less definitely than ἐάν c. subj., usu. with opt. with ἄν in apod., ἦ κεν γηθήσαι Πρίαμος Πριάμοιό τε παῖδες.. εἰ σφῶιν τάδε πάντα πυθοίατο μαρναμένοιιν surely they would exult, if they should hear.., Il.1.255, cf. 7.28, Od.3.223;

    εἴης φορητὸς οὐκ ἄν, εἰ πράσσοις καλῶς A.Pr. 979

    ;

    οὐδὲ γὰρ ἄν με ἐπαινοίη, εἰ ἐξελαύνοιμι τοὺς εὐεργέτας X.An.7.7.11

    ;

    οἶκος δ' αὐτός, εἰ φθογγὴν λάβοι, σαφέστατ' ἂν λέξειεν A.Ag.37

    , etc.: [tense] fut. opt. is f.l. in Pl.Tht. 164a: with [tense] pres. ind. in apod., Xenoph.34.3, Democr.253: with [tense] fut.ind., Meliss.5.
    b in Hom.sts. with [tense] pres. opt., to express an unfulfilled present condition, εἰ μὲν νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ τὰ πρῶτα φεροίμην if we were now contending, etc., Il.23.274: rarely in Trag., εἰ μὴ κνίζοι ( = εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568; also

    εἰ ἀναγκαῖον εἴη ἀδικεῖν ἢ ἀδικεῖσθαι, ἑλοίμην ἂν μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθαι Pl.Grg. 469c

    .
    2 when the apodosis is past, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition in past time (corresponding to use of subj. in present time, supr. 11.2); once in Hom.,

    εἴ τίς με.. ἐνίπτοι, ἀλλὰ σὺ τόν γ'.. κατέρυκες Il.24.768

    ; εἰ δέ τινας θορυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο.., κατασβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν ἐπειρᾶτο if he should see ( whenever he saw) any troops in confusion, he (always) tried, X.Cyr.5.3.55, cf. An.4.5.13, Mem.4.2.40; εἴ τις ἀντείποι, εὐθὺς ἐτεθνήκει if any one made objection, he was a dead man at once, Th. 8.66;

    ἀλλ' εἴ τι μὴ φέροιμεν, ὤτρυνεν φέρειν E.Alc. 755

    . For εἰ c. ind. in this sense v. supr. 1.1: ind. and opt. are found in same sentence,

    ἐμίσει, οὐκ εἴ τις κακῶς πάσχων ἠμύνετο, ἀλλ' εἴ τις εὐεργετούμενος ἀχάριστος φαίνοιτο X.Ages.11.3

    .
    3 in oratio obliqua after past tenses, representing ἐάν c. subj. or εἰ with a primary (never an historical) tense of the ind. in oratio recta, ἐλογίζοντο ὡς, εἰ μὴ μάχοιντο, ἀποστήσοιντο αἱ πόλεις (representing ἐὰν μὴ μαχώμεθα, ἀποστήσονται) X.HG6.4.6, cf. D.21.104, X.HG5.2.2; ἔλεγεν ὅτι, εἰ βλαβερὰ πεπραχὼς εἴη, δίκαιος εἴη ζημιοῦσθαι (representing εἰ βλαβερὰ πέπραχε, δίκαιός ἐστι) ib.32, cf. An.6.6.25; εἰ δέ τινα φεύγοντα λήψοιτο, προηγόρευεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίψ χρήσοιτο (representing εἴ τινα λήψομαι, χρήσομαι) Id.Cyr.3.1.3; also, where oratio obliqua is implied in the leading clause, οὐκ ἦν τοῦ πολέμου πέρας Φιλίππῳ, εἰ μὴ Θηβαίους.. ἐχθροὺς ποιήσειε τῇ πόλει, i.e. Philip thought there would be no end to the war, unless he should make.. (his thought having been ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσω), D.18.145;

    ἐβούλοντο γὰρ σφίσιν, εἴ τινα λάβοιεν, ὑπάρχειν ἀντὶ τῶν ἔνδον, ἢν ἄρα τύχωσί τινες ἐζωγρημένοι Th.2.5

    .
    4 c. opt. with ἄν, only when the clause serves as apodosis as well as protasis, cf. Pl.Prt. 329b, D.4.18, X.Mem.1.5.3 (v.

    ἄν A. 111

    . d).
    IV c. INF., in oratio obliqua, only in Hdt.,

    εἰ γὰρ δὴ δεῖν πάντως περιθεῖναι ἄλλῳ τέῳ τὴν βασιληΐην, [ἔφη] δικαιότερον εἶναι κτλ. 1.129

    ;

    εἰ εἶναι τοῦτο μὴ φίλον 2.64

    , cf. 172, 3.105, 108.
    V after Verbs denoting wonder, delight, indignation, disappointment, contentment, and similar emotions, εἰ c. ind. is used instead of ὅτι, to express the object of the feeling in a hypothetical form, θαυμάζω εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ' ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ' ὀργίζεται, ὁρῶν .. I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry when he sees.., D.4.43;

    οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ εἰ μὴ δίκην δέδωκεν, ἀλλ' εἰ μὴ καὶ χρυσῷ στεφάνῳ στεφανωθήσεται ἀγανακτεῖ Aeschin.3.147

    : after past tenses,

    ἐθαύμασε δ' εἰ μὴ φανερόν ἐστιν X.Mem.1.1.13

    ;

    δεινὸν εἰσῄει, εἰ μὴ.. δόξει D.19.33

    ;

    ἐθαύμαζον εἴ τι ἕξει τις χρήσασθαι τῷ λόγῳ Pl.Phd. 95a

    ;

    οὐδὲ ᾐσχύνθη εἰ.. ἐπάγει D.21.105

    : in oratio obliqua (expressed or implied) c. opt., ἐπεῖπεν ὡς δεινὸν (sc. εἴη)

    εἰ.. μεγαλόψυχος γένοιτο Aeschin.2.157

    ;

    ᾤκτιρον εἰ ἁλώσοιντο X.An.1.4.7

    ; ἐθαύμαζε δ' εἴ τις ἀρετὴν ἐπαγγελλόμενος ἀργύριον πράττοιτο he wondered that any one should demand money, Id.Mem.1.2.7; ἔχαιρον ἀγαπῶν εἴ τις ἐάσοι I rejoiced, being content if any one should let it pass, Pl.R. 450a:—in this use the neg. οὐ is also found,

    ἀγανακτῶ εἰ ὁ Φίλιππος ἁρπάζων οὐ λυπεῖ D.8.55

    ;

    δεινὸν ἂν εἴη εἰ οἱ ἐκείνων ξύμμαχοι οὐκ ἀπεροῦσιν Th.1.121

    ;

    τέρας λέγεις, εἰ οὐκ ἂν δύναιντο λαθεῖν Pl.Men. 91d

    , etc.
    VI in citing a fact as a ground of argument or appeal, as surely as, since, εἴ ποτ' ἔην γε if there was [as there was], i.e. as sure as there was such an one, Il.3.180, al.;

    εἰ τότε κοῦρος ἔα, νῦν αὖτέ με γῆρας ὀπάζει 4.321

    ; πολλοὺς γὰρ οἶκε εἶναι εὐπετέστερον διαβάλλειν ἢ ἕνα, εἰ Κλεομένεα μὲν μοῦνον οὐκ οἷός τε ἐγένετο διαβαλεῖν, τρεῖς δὲ μυριάδας Ἀθηναίων ἐποίησε τοῦτο it seems easier to deceive many than one, if (as was the fact, i.e. since) he was not able.., Hdt.5.97, cf. 1.60,al.
    VII ELLIPTICAL CONSTRUCTIONS:
    1 with apodosis implied in the context, εἰ having the force of in case, supposing that, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν, ἐχώρουν they marched towards the city [so as to meet the citizens], in case they should rush out, Th.6.100; ἱκέται πρὸς σὲ δεῦρ' ἀφίγμεθα, εἴ τινα πόλιν φράσειας ἡμῖν εὔερον we have come hither to you, in case you should tell us of some fleecy city (i.e. that we might hear of it), Ar.Av. 120; παρέζεο καὶ λαβὲ γούνων, αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι sit by him and grasp his knees [so as to persuade him], in case he be willing to help the Trojans, Il.1.408, cf. 66, Od.1.94, 3.92; ἄκουσον καὶ ἐμοῦ, ἐάν σοι ἔτι ταὐτὰ δοκῇ hear me also [that you may assent], in case the same opinion please you, Pl.R. 358b; ἰδὲ δή, ἐάν σοι ὅπερ ἐμοὶ συνδοκῇ look now, in case you approve what I do, ib. 434a.
    2 with apodosis suppressed for rhetorical reasons, εἴ περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλῃσιν Ὀλύμπιος.. στυφελίξαι if he wish to thrust him away, [he will do so], Il.1.580; εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας—· εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they shall give me a prize, [well and good]; but if they give not, then I will take one for myself, 1.135, cf. 6.150, Ar.Pl. 468; καὶ ἢν μὲν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα—· εἰ δὲ μή .. and if the attempt succeed, [well]; otherwise.., Th.3.3, cf. Pl.Prt. 325d.
    3 with the Verb of the protasis omitted, chiefly in the following expressions:
    a εἰ μή except,

    οὐδὲν ἄλλο σιτέονται, εἰ μὴ ἰχθῦς μοῦνον Hdt. 1.200

    ; μὰ τὼ θεώ, εἰ μὴ Κρίτυλλά γ' [εἰμί]—nay, if I'm not Critylla! i.e. I am, Ar.Th. 898; εἰ μὴ ὅσον except only,

    ἐγὼ μέν μιν οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ ὅσον γραφῇ Hdt.2.73

    , cf. 1.45, 2.20;

    εἰ μὴ εἰ Th.1.17

    , Pl.Grg. 480b, etc.; εἰ μή τι οὖν, ἀλλὰ σμικρόν γέ μοι τῆς ἀρχῆς χάλασον if nothing else, yet.., Id.Men. 86e; ironical,

    εἰ μὴ ἄρα ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν X.Mem.1.2.8

    ;

    εἰ μή πέρ γε τὸν ὑοσκύαμον χρήματα εἶναι φήσομεν Id.Oec.1.13

    .
    b εἰ δὲ μή but if not, i.e. otherwise,

    προηγόρευε τοῖς Λαμψακηνοῖσι μετιέναι Μιλτιάδεα, εἰ δὲ μή, σφέας πίτυος τρόπον ἀπείλεε ἐκτρίψειν Hdt.6.37

    , cf. 56; after μάλιστα μέν, Th.1.32,35, etc.:—after a preceding neg., μὴ τύπτ'· εἰ δὲ μή, σαυτόν ποτ' αἰτιάσει don't beat me; otherwise, you will have yourself to blame, Ar.Nu. 1433;

    ὦ Κῦρε, μὴ οὕτω λέγε· εἰ δὲ μή, οὐ θαρροῦντά με ἕξεις X.Cyr.3.1.35

    ;

    οὔτ' ἐν τῷ ὕδατι τὰ ὅπλα ἦν ἔχειν· εἰ δὲ μή Id.An.4.3.6

    , cf. Th.1.28, 131, Pl.Phd. 91c.
    c εἰ δέ sts. stands for

    εἰ δὲ μή, εἰ μὲν βούλεται, ἑψέτω· εἰ δ', ὅτι βούλεται, τοῦτο ποιείτω Pl.Euthd. 285c

    , cf. Smp. 212c;

    εἰ δ' οὖν S.Ant. 722

    ;

    εἰ δ' οὕτως Arist.EN 1094a24

    ; εἰ δὲ τοῦτο and if so, Str.2.1.29.
    d εἰ γάρ for if so, Id.7.3.6.
    e εἴ τις if any, i. e. as much as or more than any,

    τῶν γε νῦν αἴ τις ἐπιχθονίων, ὀρθῶς B.5.5

    ;

    ὄτλον ἄλγιστον ἔσχον, εἴ τις Αἰτωλὶς γυνή S.Tr.8

    , cf. OC 734; εἴ τις ἄλλος, siquis alius, E.Andr.6, etc.;

    εἴ τινες καὶ ἄλλοι Hdt.3.2

    , etc.;

    εἴπερ τις ἄλλος Pl.R. 501d

    ; also κατ' εἰ δέ τινα τρόπον in any way, IG 5(2).6.27 ([place name] Tegea).
    f εἴ ποτε or εἴπερ ποτέ now if ever,

    ἡμῖν δὲ καλῶς, εἴπερ ποτέ, ἔχει.. ἡ ξυναλλαγή Th.4.20

    , cf. Ar.Eq. 594;

    αἴ ποτα κἄλλοτα Alc.Supp.7.11

    , cf. X.An.6.4.12, etc.; but in prayers,

    εἴ ποτέ τοι ἐπὶ νηὸν ἔρεψα.. τόδε μοι κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ Il.1.39

    .
    g εἴ ποθεν (sc. δυνατόν ἐστι) if from any quarter, i.e. from some quarter or other, S.Ph. 1204 (lyr.); so εἴ ποθι somewhere, anywhere, Id.Aj. 885 (lyr.);

    εἴ που Od.4.193

    .
    h εἴ πως ib. 388, X.An.2.3.11: in an elliptical sentence (cf. VII. 1),

    πρέσβεις πέμψαντες, εἴ πως πείσειαν Th.1.58

    .
    VIII with other PARTICLES:
    2 for ὡς εἰ, ὡς εἴ τε, ὥσπερ εἰ, etc., v. ὡς and ὥσπερ.
    3 for εἰ ἄρα, v. ἄρα; for εἰ δή, εἴπερ, v. εἰ δή, εἴπερ; for εἴ γε, v. γέ.
    IX in neg. oaths, = Hebr. im, LXXPs.94(95).11, Ev.Marc.8.12, al.
    C IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS, whether, folld. by the ind., subj., or opt., according to the principles of oratio obliqua:
    1 with IND. after primary tenses, representing the same tense in the direct question, σάφα δ' οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ θεός ἐστιν whether he is a god, Il.5.183;

    εἰ ξυμπονήσεις.. σκόπει S.Ant.41

    .
    2 with SUBJ. after primary tenses, representing a dubitative subj. in the direct question, τὰ ἐκπώματα οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τουτῳῒ δῶ whether I should give them, X.Cyr.8.4.16: sts. elliptical,

    ἐς τὰ χρηστήρια ἔπεμπε, εἰ στρατεύηται ἐπὶ τοὺς Πέρσας Hdt.1.75

    .
    3 OPT. after past tenses, representing either of the two previous constructions in the direct question, ἤρετο εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος he asked whether any one was wiser than I (direct ἔστι τις σοφώτερος;), Pl.Ap. 21a;

    ἐπεκηρυκεύετο Πεισιστράτῳ, εἰ βούλοιτό οἱ τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα Hdt.1.60

    : rarely [tense] aor. opt. for the [tense] aor. ind., ἠρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ ἀναπλεύσειεν I asked him whether he had set sail (direct ἀνέπλευσας;), D.50.55: but [tense] aor. opt. usually represents [tense] aor. subj., τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν.. καὶ τιμωρίαν τινὰ πειρῷντ' ἀπ' αὐτῶν ποιεῖσθαι they asked whether they should deliver their city to the Corinthians, and should try.., Th.1.25:—in both constructions the ind. or subj. may be retained, ψῆφον ἐβούλοντο ἐπαγαγεῖν εἰ χρὴ πολεμεῖν ib. 119; ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν.. εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται whether they should burn them or should dispose of them in some other way, Id.2.4; ἀνακοινοῦσθαι αὐτὸν αὑτῷ εἰ δῷ ἐπιψηφίσαι τοῖς προέδροις [he said that] he consulted him whether he should give.., Aeschin.2.68.
    4 with OPT. and ἄν when this was the form of the direct question, ἠρώτων εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτων τὰ πιστά they asked whether they would give (direct δοιήτε ἄν;), X.An.4.8.7.
    5 the NEG. used with εἰ in indirect questions is οὐ, when οὐ would be used in the direct question, ἐνετέλλετο.. εἰρωτᾶν εἰ οὔ τι ἐπαισχύνεται whether he is not ashamed, Hdt.1.90, etc.; but if μή would be required in the direct form, it is retained in the indirect, οὐ τοῦτο ἐρωτῶ, ἀλλ' εἰ τοῦ μὲν δικαίου μὴ ἀξιοῖ πλέον ἔχειν μηδὲ βούλεται ὁ δίκαιος, τοῦ δὲ ἀδίκου (the direct question would be μὴ ἀξιοῖ μηδὲ βούλεται; he does not see fit nor wish, does he?) Pl.R. 349b:—in double indirect questions, εἴτε.. εἴτε.. ; εἰ.. εἴτε.. ; εἴτε.. ἢ .., either οὐ or μή can be used in the second clause,

    ὅπως ἴδῃς εἴτ' ἔνδον εἴτ' οὐκ ἔνδον S.Aj.7

    ;

    σκοπῶμεν εἰ ἡμῖν πρέπει ἢ οὔ Pl.R. 451d

    ; εἰ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή, πειράσομαι μαθεῖν ib. 339a;

    πολλὰ ἂν περιεσκέψω, εἴτε ἐπιτρεπτέον εἴτε οὔ·.. οὐδένα λόγον οὐδὲ συμβουλὴν ποιῇ, εἴτε χρὴ ἐπιτρέπειν σαυτὸν αὐτῷ εἴτε μή Id.Prt. 313a

    , 313b;

    ἀνάγκη τὴν ἐμὴν μητέρα, εἴτε θυγάτηρ ἦν Κίρωνος εἴτε μή, καὶ εἰ παρ' ἐκείνῳ διῃτᾶτο ἢ οὔ, καὶ γάμους εἰ διττοὺς ὑπὲρ ταύτης εἱστίασεν ἢ μὴ.. πάντα ταῦτα εἰδέναι τοὺς οἰκέτας Is.8.9

    ; τοὺς νόμους καταμανθάνειν εἰ καλῶς κεῖνται ἢ μή.. τοὺς λόγους εἰ ὀρθῶς ὑμᾶς διδάσκουσιν ἢ οὔ Antipho 5.14.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰ

  • 8 EK

    I) pers. pron. I;
    in poetry and old prose a pronominal k is suffixed to the verb, emk = em ek, vask = vas ek; sák = sá ek; mundak = munda ek; even if preceded by ek: ek sék, ek sitk; a preceding g becomes by assimilation k, hykk = hygg ek; the pronominal k is inserted between the suffixed negative, -a or -at, and the verb, sáka = sá ek-a, I saw not; veitka = veit ek-a, I know not.
    II) from aka.
    * * *
    pers. pron., mod. eg, proncd. ég or jeg; eg occurs as early as in MSS. of the 15th century, Arna-Magn. 556 A; jak, Fms. x. 287, cp. the mod. Swed. form and the mod. Icel. jeg; old poets make it rhyme with ek, as, Halldórr ok ek | höfum engi þrek, Korm. 154 (in a verse), cp. Ld. 108: [Ulf. ïk, but ek on the Golden horn and on the stone in Tune; A. S. ic; Engl. I; Germ. ich; old Swed. jak, mod. jag; Dan. jeg; cp. Lat. ego, Gr. ἐγώ]:—I, Nj. 10, 30, 132, etc.
    2. in poetry and old prose a pronominal ‘k or ‘g is suffixed to the verb; em’k búinn annan í at nefna, Grág. i. 103; ek em’k, 623. 56, Blas. 41, Mork. 89, 94, 99, 104, Vþm. 8, Ls. 14, Ad. 1, Post. 645. 33; jók’k, ‘I eked’ ( added), Íb. (pref.); vas’k þar fjórtán vetr, ch. 9; þá er ek var’k á bænum, Blas. 40, Hm. 12; ek bað’k, Post. 645. 54; ek kom’k, Skm. 18; ek sit’k, Mork. 168; ek finn’k, 141; ek nam’k, 73; sá’k, 75; ek sé’k ( video), 103, 168, Fms. xi. 110; mun’k-at ek, Mork. 50; svá ek vind’k, Hm. 156; ok rít’k á þessa lund, Skálda (Thorodd) 166; sjá’k ( sim), Mork. 183: g before k becomes by assimilation k, e. g. hyk’k = hygg’k, Skm. 5: the pronominal k is inserted between the suffixed negative and the verb, ek skal’k-a, hef’k-a, mon’k-a, sa’k-a, ma’k-a, veit’k-a, or skal’k-a ek, hef’k-a ek, etc.: even a double k after a diphthong, siá’kk ( sim), Mork. 89, 134, but chiefly in poetry with the suffixed negative, e. g. ek sé’kk-a: this form is obsolete, whereas the suffixed g (or k) in bisyllables or after a vowel is more freq.; svá at ek fæ’k eigi leyzt mik, Edda 20; er ek vilda’g helzt, Fms. xi. 146; eigi munda’k trúa, Edda 32; ef ek lifi ok mega’k ráða, 34; þá hafða’k bundit með gresjarni, id.; sem önga frægð muna’k af hljóta, 20; sýnda’k bæði þeim ok Sæmundi, Íb. (pref.); þá er ek var heima heyrða’k sagt, Edda 81; er ek aeva kenni’g, Hm. 164; draums ætli’g þér, Hdl. 7; þorða’g, Ad. 1; ræka’g, mætta’g, Stor. 8; sky’t ek ok ræ’k (ræ’g, v. l.), Fms. vi. 170 (in a verse); líkara at ek vitja’g hingat þessa heita, Eg. 319; næða’k (or næða’g), if I could reach, Eb. 70 (in a verse); at ek nemni þá menn alla ok beiði’g, Grág. ii. 317; vilja’k, I will, Ht. 1; þvíat ek ætla’g, Ó. H. 59; ok náða’k svá öllu ríki þeirra, 74; þvíat ek trúi’k yðr bezt, 88; ek setta’k, Mork. 62; flytta’k, 94; geri’k, heyrða’k, 36; mæli’g, 39; ek vetti’g, 175; tefli’g, 186; setta’g, lagða’g, id.; vilda’g, 193; vide Lex. Poët. and the word ‘-at’ [p. 2]: sometimes a double pronoun occurs, g and k, mátti’g-a’k, Og. 32; bjargi’g-a’k, Hm. 153; stöðvi’g-a’k, 151; hversu ek má’k, Fms. vi. 102; vide Lex. Poët. and Frump. 228 sqq.
    B. DAT. AND ACC. are from a different root:—dat. mér, [Ulf. mis; Germ. mir; lost in Dan.], Nj. 10, etc. etc.; acc. mik, mod. mig, which form occurs even in MSS. at the beginning of the 14th century, e. g. Hauks-bók: mek occurs now and then in MSS., e. g. O. H. L., N. G. L., Sks. B, else it is rare and obsolete, Al. 42, Ó. H. 107, [Ulf. mik; A. S. mec; Engl. me; Germ. mich; Dan. mig.] As the word is so common, we shall only mention the use of mik which is special to the Scandinavian tongue, viz. its use as a verbal suffix. The ancients had a double form for the reflexive; for 1st pers. -mk, i. e. mik suffixed to the plur. of the verb; for the 3rd pers. -sk, i. e. sik suffixed to sing. and plur. alike; thus, ek (vér) þykkjumk, I (we) seem to myself ( ourselves); but hann þykkisk, he seems to himself; þeir þykkjask, they seem to themselves: the -mk was later changed into -mz, or - mst of editions and mod. use; but this is a grammatical decay, as if both - mst and -st (þykjumst and þykist) arose from the same reflex. sik.
    1. the subject may be another person or thing (plur. or sing.) and the personal pronoun mik suffixed as object to the verb, a kind of middle voice found in very old poems, and where it occurs freq. it is a test of antiquity; in prose it is quite obsolete: jötna vegir stóðum’k yfir ok undir, the ways of giants (i. e. precipices) stood above and beneath me, Hm. 106; er lögðum’k arm yfir, the lass who laid her arms round me, 108; mögr hétum’k fögru, my son promised me fair, Egil; hilmir buðum’k löð (acc.), the king gave me leave, i. e. bade me, sing, Höfuðl. 2; úlfs bagi gáfum’k íþrótt, the wolf’s foe ( Odin) gave me the art ( poetry), Stor. 23; Ragnarr gáfum’k reiðar mána, R. gave me the shield, Bragi; þat erum’k sýnt, it is shewn to me, id.; stöndum’k ilmr fyrir yndi, the lass blights my joy, Kormak; hugr tjáðum’k, courage helped me, Egil; snertum’k harmr við hjarta, grief touches me to the heart, Landn.; stöndum’k til hjarta hjörr, the sword pierces me to the heart, Fm. i; feldr brennum’k, my cloak catches fire, Gm. 1; draum dreymðum’k, I dreamed a dream; grimt várum’k hlið, the gap ( breach) was terrible to me, Stor. 6; hálf ván féllum’k, half my hope failed me, Gráfeldar-drápa; heiðnir rekkar hnekðum’k, the heathen men turned me out, Sighvat; dísir hvöttum’k at, the ‘dísir’ hooted us, Hðm. 29; gumi görðum’k at vigi, the man made us fight, id.; lyst várum’k, it list me, Am. 74: very common is erum’k, ‘tis to me (us); erum’k van, I (we) have to expect; mjök erum’k tregt tungu at hræra, ‘tis hard for me to move the tongue, i. e. the tongue cleaves to my mouth, Stor. 1, 17, Ad. 16.
    2. sometimes oneself is the subject, freq. in prose and poetry, either in deponent verbs or as reflex. or recipr.; at vit skilim’k sáttir, Ó. H. 119; at vér komim’k, that we shall come, 85; finnum’k hér þá, 108; ef vér finnum’k, 111; ek skildum’k við Ólaf konung, 126; ef ek komum’k í braut, 140; sigrom’k, if I gain the victory, 206; æðrom’k, 214; ef ek öndum’k, if I die, Eg. 127; ek berum’k, I bear myself, Grág. ii. 57, Mork. passim; ek þykkjum’k, þóttum’k, ráðum’k, látum’k, setjum’k, bjóðum’k, skildum’k, kveljum’k, etc., = ek þykisk, þóttisk, ræðsk, lætsk, setsk, býðsk, skildisk, kvelsk, etc.: even at the present day the forms eg þykjumst, þóttumst are often used in writing; in other words the suffix - mst (-mk) is almost obsolete.
    β. the obsolete interjection er mik = I am; vel er mik, well is me (= ‘bless me!’), O. H. L. 71; æ er mik, ah me! 64; kendr er mik, I am known, 66: with a reflex. notion, hvat er mik at því, what is that to me? Skv. 1. 28; er mik þat undir frétt þeirri, that is my reason for asking, Grág. i. 19:—this ‘er mik’ is clearly the remains of the old erum’k.
    C. DUAL AND PLUR. also from a different root:
    1. dual vit, mod. við, a Norse form mit also occurs, Al. 170, 171, [cp. mi, Ivar Aasen]:—we two; gen. and dat. from a different root, okkar and okkr, [cp. Goth. ïggqis; A. S. inc and incer; O. H. G. inch and inchar; Ivar Aasen dikke and dykk]:—our.
    2. plur.:
    α. nom. vér and vær, the last form now obsolete, [Goth. veis; A. S. and Engl. we; Germ. wir; Dan. vi]:—we.
    β. gen. vár, mod. vor, Eg. 524, Fms. viii. 213, 398, etc.
    γ. dat. and acc. oss, [Goth. uns (acc.), unsis (dat.); A. S. us; Germ. uns; Swed. oss; Dan. os]:—us: it need only be noticed that in mod. familiar usage the dual—við, okkr, okkar—has taken the place of the plural, vér, oss; but that in written books the forms vér, oss are still in freq. use, except in light or familiar style; old writers, on the other hand, made a clear distinction both in speech and writing.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > EK

  • 9 πέτομαι

    πέτομαι, [ per.] 2sg.
    A

    πέτεαι Anacr.9

    : [tense] impf. ἐπετόμην, [dialect] Ep. πετ- Il.5.366, etc.: [tense] fut.

    πετήσομαι Ar. Pax77

    , cf. 1126 ( ἀπο-); shortd. πτήσομαι (ἐκ-) Id.V. 208, and always in early Prose, ( ἀνα-) Pl.Lg. 905a, al., Aeschin.3.209, ( ἐπι-) Hdt.7.15 (mostly in compds., but πτήσεσθαι in later Prose, Lib.Or.2.27): [tense] aor. ἐπτόμην, inf.

    πτέσθαι S.OT17

    ; elsewh. in compds., ( ἐπι-) Il.4.126, (ἀν-) Antipho Fr.58, etc.; freq. also ἐπτάμην, Il.13.592, E.Hel.18, ( παρ-) Semon.13, (ἐς-) Hdt.9.100; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg.

    πτάτο Il.23.880

    , inf. πτάσθαι ( δια-) E.Med.1, part.

    πτάμενος Il.5.282

    , 22.362, etc. (in codd. of Pl. forms of ἐπτόμην in compds. predominate over those from ἐπτάμην; δι-έπτατο is found in codd. of Ar. V. 1086, ἐκ-πτόμενος folld. by

    κατ-έπτατο Id.Av. 788

     sq.; ἀν-επτάμαν is prob. in S.Aj. 693 (lyr.), προς-έπτατο ib. 382); subj. πτῆται for πτᾶται, Il.15.170: also [tense] aor. of act. form ἔπτην, ἔπτης, IG14.2550, Luc. Trag.218,

    ἔπτη Batr.208

    , Nonn.D.2.223, al., Anacreont.22.3 ; opt.

    πταίης AP5.151

     (Mel.); part.

    πτᾶσα h.Cer. 398

    , Hdn.Gr.1.532; elsewh. only in compds., (δι-) IG3.1386, (ἐξ-) Hes.Op.98, (ἀν-) S.Ant. 1307, E.Med. 440, ( προς-) A.Pr. 115, ( ὑπερ-) S.Ant. 113 (Trag. only in lyr.): [tense] pf. πέπτηκα only as a coinage in Choerob. in Theod.2.79, elsewh. πεπότημαι (v. ποτάομαι): [tense] aor. [voice] Pass.

    ἐπετάσθην Arist.HA 624b6

     ( εἰς-), LXX Ps.17(18).10, Ho.9.11 (ἐξ-), Sotion p.186 W., D.S.4.77 (ἐξ-): [tense] fut. [voice] Pass.

    πετασθήσομαι LXX Hb.1.8

    .—The only [tense] pres. in Hom. and [dialect] Att. Prose is πέτομαι; [full] πέταμαι is used by Sapph.Supp.10.8, Simon. 30, Pi.P.8.90, N.6.48, E. Ion 90 (anap.), AP11.208 (Lucill.), and in later Prose, as Arist.IA 709b10, HA 609a14 ( περι-), cf. Moer.p.311 P.; noted as archaic by Luc.Pseudol.29: [tense] aor. imper.

    πέτασσαι Anacreont. 14.2

    ; [full] ἵπταμαι (q. v.) is first found in late writers, Mosch.3.43, Babr. 65.4, etc. (mostly in compds., cf. ἐξίπταμαι; ἀφίπτατο in E.IA 1608 is spurious), and is censured by Luc.Lex.25, Sol.7 :— fly, of birds, Il. 12.207, 13.62, Od.2.147, etc.; of bees, gnats, etc., Il.2.89, Hdt.2.95; of a departing spirit,

    ψυχὴ ἐκ ῥεθέων πταμένη Ἄϊδόσδε βεβήκει Il.22.362

    ;

    ἐκ μελέων θυμὸς πτάτο 23.880

    : metaph., of young children,

    οὐδέπω μακρὰν πτέσθαι σθενοντες S.OT17

    ; also of arrows, javelins, etc., Il.20.99, etc.; ὀλοοίτροχος.. ἀναθρῴσκων π. 13.140 (but ἐκ χειρῶν ἔπτατ' ἐρετμά, τεύχεα fell suddenly.., Od.12.203, 24.534); of any quick motion, dart, rush, of men, Il.13.755, 22.143, etc.; of horses,

    μάστιξεν δ' ἐλάαν, τὼ δ' οὐκ ἀέκοντε πετέσθην 5.366

    , cf. 768, etc.; of chariots, Hes.Sc. 308; of dancers, E.Cyc.71 (lyr.); πέτον fly! i.e. make haste! Ar.Lys. 321; ἔχρην πετομένας ἥκειν πάλαι ib.55 ;

    πολλοὶ ἥξουσι πετόμενοι Pl.R. 567d

    , cf. 467d; πέτονται.. ἐπὶ ταῦτ' ἄκλητοι, of parasites, Antiph.229.
    II metaph. and proverbial usages:—to be on the wing, flutter, of uncertain hopes, ἐξ ἐλπίδος π. Pi.P.8.90; π.

    ἐλπίσιν S.OT 487

     (lyr.); of fickle natures,

    πέτει τε καὶ φρονῶν οὐδὲν φρονεῖς E.Ba. 332

     ; ἐφ' ἕτερον π. Ar.Ec. 899; ὄρνις πετόμενος a bird ever on the wing, Id.Av. 169; πετόμενόν τινα διώκεις 'you are chasing a butterfly', Pl.Euthphr.4a, cf. Arist.Metaph. 1009b38; of fame, fly abroad,

    πέταται τηλόθεν ὄνυμ' αὐτῶν Pi.N.6.48

    .
    2 c. dat., πτάμενος νοήματι flying in mind, Id.Fr.122.4. (Cf. πίπτω, Skt. pátati 'fly', 'fall', Lat. prae-pes, etc.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πέτομαι

  • 10 εἰς

    εἰς or [full] ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in Hom., [dialect] Ion. poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in Hdt. and Hp., and is found in nearly all early [dialect] Ion. Inscrr. (exc. IG12(8).262.16 (Thasos, v B. C.), ib.7.235.1 (Oropus, iv B. C.)); εἰς in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. from iv B. C., IG2.115, etc.; and usu. in [dialect] Att. Prose (exc. Th.) and Com. (exc. in parody): Trag. apptly. prefer εἰς, but ἐς is used before vowels metri gr.; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω) , ἐς μακαρίαν. [dialect] Aeol. poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in Hom. by An.Ox. 1.172, cf. Hellad. ap. Phot.Bibl.p.533B. (Orig. ἐνς, as in IG4.554.7 ([place name] Argos), GDI4986.11 ([place name] Crete); cf. ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in [dialect] Aeol. εἰς, but spurious in [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion.) Radical sense
    A into, and then more loosely, to:
    I OF PLACE, the oldest and commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Il.1.141, al.;

    εἰς ἅλαδε Od.10.351

    ;

    ἔς ῥ' ἀσαμίνθους 4.48

    ; ἐς οἶνον βάλε φάρμακον ib. 220; freq. of places, to,

    εἰς Εὔβοιαν 3.174

    ; ἐς Αἴγυπτον, etc., Hdt.1.5, etc.; ἐς Μίλητον into the territory of Miletus, ib.14;

    εἰς Ἑλλήσποντον εἰσέπλει X.HG1.1.2

    ;

    ἀφίκετο εἰς Μήδους πρὸς Κυαξάρην Id.Cyr.2.1.2

    ; εἰς ἅρματα βαίνειν to step into.., Il.8.115;

    εἰς ἐλάτην ἀναβῆναι 14.287

    ; opp. ἐκ, in such phrases as ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης, ἐς πόδας ἐκ κεφαλῆς, from heel to ankle-joint, from head to foot, 22.397, 23.169;

    ἐκ πάτου ἐς σκοπιήν 20.137

    ;

    ἐς μυχὸν ἐξ οὐδοῦ Od.7.87

    ; κἠς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theoc. 18.15: with Verbs implying motion or direction, as of looking,

    ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.3.364

    ; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, 9.373, etc.; εἰς ὦπα ἔοικεν he is like in face (sc. ἰδόντι), 3.158, etc.; ἐς ὀφθαλμούς τινος ἐλθεῖν to come before another's eyes, 24.204;

    ἐς ὄψιν ἀπικνέεσθαί τινος Hdt.1.136

    ;

    καλέσαι τινὰ ἐς ὄψιν Id.5.106

    , etc.; ἐς ταὐτὸν ἥκειν come to the same point, E.Hipp. 273: less freq. after a Subst.,

    ὁδὸς ἐς λαύρην Od.22.128

    ; τὸ ἐς Παλλήνην τεῖχος facing Pallene, Th.1.56;

    ξύνοδος ἐς τὴν Δῆλον Id.3.104

    , cf.Pl.Tht. 173d.
    b [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion., also c. acc. pers. ([dialect] Att. ὡς, πρός, παρά), Il.7.312, 15.402, Od.14.127, Hdt.4.147; also in [dialect] Att. with collective Nouns,

    ἐς τὸν δῆμον παρελθόντες Th. 5.45

    , or plurals,

    εἰς ὑμᾶς εἰσῆλθον D.18.103

    ; esp. of consulting an oracle,

    ἐς θεὸν ἐλθεῖν Pi.O.7.31

    ;

    εἰς Ἄμμων' ἐλθόντες Ar.Av. 619

    .
    2 with Verbs expressing restin a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκεν ἐπὶ θρόνου he put it in the house (i.e. he brought it into the house, and put it there), Od.20.96; ἐς θρόνους ἕζοντο they sat them down upon the seats, 4.51, cf. 1.130; ἐφάνη λὶς εἰς ὁδόν the lion appeared in the path, Il.15.276;

    ἀπόστολος ἐς τὴν Μίλητον ἦν Hdt.1.21

     (s. v.l.);

    αὐτὸς ἐς Αακεδαίμονα ἀπόστολος ἐγίνετο Id.5.38

    ;

    ἐς κώμην παραγίνονται Id.1.185

    ;

    παρῆν ἐς Σάρδις Id.6.1

    ;

    ἐς δόμους μένειν S.Aj.80

     (cod. Laur.);

    ἐς τὴν νῆσον κατέκλῃσε Th.1.109

    , cf. Hdt.3.13; ἀπόβασιν ποιήσασθαι ἐς .. Th.2.33, etc.; later used like ἐν, τὴν γῆν εἰς ἣν ὑμεῖς κατοικεῖτε LXX Nu.35.34;

    τὸ χρυσίον ὃ εἰλήφεσαν εἰς Ῥώμην D.S.14.117

    ;

    οἰκεῖν εἰς τὰ Ὕπατα Luc.Asin.1

    ;

    εἰς Ἐκβάτανα ἀποθανεῖν Ael.VH7.8

    ;

    εἰς ἅπασαν τὴν γῆν Suid.

     s.v. Καλλίμαχος: generally,

    τοὔνομα εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα, φασίν, Ἱππομιγὴς δύναται Ael.VH9.16

    .
    4 elliptical usages,
    a after Verbs which have no sense of motion to or into a place, τὴν πόλιν ἐξέλιπον εἰς χωρίον ὀχυρόν they quitted the city for a strong position, i.e. to seek a strong position, X.An.1.2.24; γράμματα ἑάλωσαν εἰς Ἀθήνας letters were captured [and sent] to Athens, Id.HG1.1.23, cf. Pl.R. 468a;

    ἀνίστασθαι ἐς Ἄργος E.Heracl.59

    , cf. Pl.Phd. 116a.
    b participles signifying motion are freq. omitted with εἰς, τοῖς στρατηγοῖς τοῖς εἰς Σικελίαν (sc. ἀποδειχθεῖσιν) And.1.11, etc.
    c c. gen., mostly of proper names, as εἰς Ἀΐδαο, [dialect] Att. εἰς Ἅιδου [δόμους], Il.21.48; ἐς Ἀθηναίης [ἱερόν] to the temple of Athena, 6.379; ἐς Πριάμοιο [οἶκον] 24.160, cf. 309; εἰς Αἰγύπτοιο [ῥόον] Od.4.581;

    ἐς τοῦ Κλεομένεος Hdt.5.51

    ;

    εἰς Ἀσκληπιοῦ Ar.Pl. 411

    ;

    ἐπὶ δεῖπνον [ἰέναι] εἰς Ἀγάθωνος Pl.Smp. 174a

    : with Appellatives, ἀνδρὸς ἐς ἀφνειοῦ to a rich man's house, Il.24.482;

    ἐς πατρός Od.2.195

    ; πέμπειν εἰς διδασκάλων send to school, X.Lac.2.1;

    εἰς δ. φοιτᾶν Pl.Prt. 326c

    ; ἐς σεωυτοῦ, ἑωυτοῦ, Hdt.1.108, 9.108, etc.
    II OF TIME,
    1 to denote a certain point or limit of time, up to, until,

    ἐς ἠῶ Od.11.375

    ; ἐς ἠέλιον καταδύντα till sunset, 9.161 (but also, towards or near sunset, 3.138);

    ἐκ νεότητος ἐς γῆρας Il.14.86

    ;

    ἐκ παιδὸς ἐς γῆρας Aeschin.1.180

    ; ἐς ἐμέ up to my time, Hdt.1.92, al.: with Advbs., εἰς ὅτε (cf. ἔς τε) against the time when.., Od.2.99; εἰς πότε; until when ? how long ? S.Aj. 1185 (lyr., cf.

    εἰσόκἐ; εἰς ὁπότε Aeschin.3.99

    ; ἐς τί; = εἰς πότε; Il.5.465; ἐς ὅ until, Hdt.1.93, etc.;

    ἐς οὗ Id.1.67

    , 3.31, etc.;

    ἐς τόδε Id.7.29

    , etc.
    2 to determine a period, εἰς ἐνιαυτόν for a year, i.e. a whole year, Il.19.32, Od.4.526; within the year, ib.86 (cf.

    ἐς ἐνίαυτον Alc.Supp.8.12

    );

    εἰς ὥρας Od.9.135

    ; ἐς θέρος ἢ ἐς ὀπώρην for the summer, i.e. throughout it, 14.384; ἡ εἰς ἐνιαυτὸν κειμένη δαπάνη εἰς τὸν μῆνα δαπανᾶται the expenditure for a year is expended in the month, X.Oec.7.36;

    μισθοδοτεῖν τινὰς εἰς ἓξ μῆνας D.S.19.15

    ;

    χοίνικα κριθῶν εἰς τέσσαρας ἡμέρας διεμέτρει Posidon. 36J.

    ; εἰς ἑσπέραν ἥκειν to come at even, Ar.Pl. 998; εἰς τρίτην ἡμέραν or εἰς τρίτην alone, on the third day, in two days, Pl.Hp.Ma. 286b, X.Cyr.5.3.27;

    ἥκειν ἐς τὴν ὑστεραίαν Id.An.2.3.25

    ;

    ἥκειν εἰς τὸ ἔαρ Hell.Oxy.17.4

    ; ἐς τέλος at last, Hdt.3.40; ἐς καιρόν in season, Id.4.139; οὐκ ἐς ἀναβολάς, ἀμβολάς, with no delay, Id.8.21, E.Heracl. 270, etc.; ἐς τότε at this time, v.l. in Od.7.317 (but εἰς τότε at that time (in the [tense] fut.), D.14.24, Pl.Lg. 830b); ἐς ὕστερον or τὸ ὕστερον, Od.12.126, Th.2.20: with Advbs.,

    ἐς αὔριον Il.8.538

    , Pl. Lg. 858b;

    ἔς περ ὀπίσσω Od.20.199

    ;

    ἐς αὖθις Th.4.63

     (v. εἰσαῦθις (; ἐς αὐτίκα μάλ' Ar. Pax 367; εἰς ἔπειτα (v. εἰσέπειτα (; ἐς τὸ ἔ., Th.2.64;

    ἐς ὀψέ Id.8.23

    ; εἰς ἅπαξ, v. εἰσάπαξ; εἰς ἔτι, v. εἰσέτι.
    2 freq. with Numerals,

    ἐς τριακάδας δέκα ναῶν A.Pers. 339

    ; ναῦς ἐς τὰς τετρακοσίας, διακοσίας, to the number of 400, etc., Th.1.74, 100, etc.; εἰς ἕνα, εἰς δύο, εἰς τέσσαρας, one, two, four deep, X.Cyr.2.3.21; but εἰς τέσσαρας four abreast, Aen.Tact.40.6: with Advbs., ἐς τρίς or ἐστρίς thrice, Pi.O.2.68, Hdt.1.86; of round numbers, about, X.An.1.1.10.
    3 distributive, εἰς φυλάς by tribes, LXX 1 Ki.10.21, cf. 2 Ki.18.
    4
    IV to express RELATION, towards, in regard to,

    ἐξαμαρτεῖν εἰς θεούς A.Pr. 945

    , etc.; ἁμάρτημα εἴς τινα, αἰτίαι ἐς ἀλλήλους, Isoc.8.96, Th.1.66;

    ὄνειδος ὀνειδίζειν εἴς τινα S.Ph. 522

    ;

    ἔχθρη ἔστινα Hdt.6.65

    ;

    φιλία ἐς ἀμφοτέρους Th.2.9

    ; λέγειν ἐς .. Hdt.1.86;

    γνώμη ἀποδεχθεῖσα ἐς τὴν γέφυραν Id.4.98

    ;

    ἡ ἐς γῆν καὶ θάλασσαν ἀρχή Th.8.46

    .
    b of the subject of a work, esp. in titles, e.g.

    τὰ ἐς Ἀπολλώνιον Philostr. VA

    ; of the object of a dedication, as in titles of hymns, ἐπινίκια, etc.
    2 in regard to,

    πρῶτος εἰς εὐψυχίαν A.Pers. 326

    ;

    σκώπτειν ἐς τὰ ῥάκια Ar. Pax 740

    , cf. Eq.90;

    διαβάλλειν τινὰ ἔς τι Th.8.88

    ;

    αἰτία ἐπιφερομένη ἐς μαλακίαν Id.5.75

    ;

    μέμφεσθαι εἰς φιλίαν X.An.2.6.30

    ;

    εἰς τὰ πολεμικὰ καταφρονεῖσθαι Id.HG7.4.30

    ;

    πόλεως εὐδοκιμωτάτης εἰς σοφίαν Pl.Ap. 29d

    ; in respect of,

    εὐτυχεῖν ἐς τέκνα E.Or. 542

    , cf. Pl.Ap. 35b, etc.;

    εἰς χρήματα ζημιοῦσθαι Id.Lg. 774b

    , cf. D.22.55; ἐς τὰ ἄλλα Th.I.I;

    εἰς ἄπαντα S.Tr. 489

    ;

    ἐς τὰ πάνθ' ὁμῶς A.Pr. 736

    ;

    εἰς μὲν ταῦτα Pl.Ly. 210a

    ; τό γ' εἰς ἑαυτόν, τὸ εἰς ἐμέ, S.OT 706, E. IT 691, cf. S.Ichn.346;

    ἐς ὀλίγους μᾶλλον τὰς ἀρχὰς ποιεῖν Th.8.53

    ;

    ἐς πλείονας οἰκεῖν Id.2.37

    ; for τελεῖν ἐς Ἕλληνας, Βοιωτούς, ἄνδρας, etc., v. τελέω.
    3 of Manner,

    ἐς τὸν νῦν τρόπον Id.1.6

    ;

    τίθεμεν τἆλλα εἰς τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον; Pl.R. 353d

    ;

    ἐς ἓν μέλος Theoc.18.7

    : freq. periphr. for Advbs., ἐς κοινὸν φράζειν, λέγειν, A.Pr. 844, Eu. 408; ἐς τὸ πᾶν, = πάντως, Id.Ag. 682(lyr.); ἐς τάχος, = ταχέως, Ar.Ach. 686; ἐς εὐτέλειαν, = εὐτελῶς, Id.Av. 805;

    ἐς τἀρχαῖον Id.Nu. 593

    ;

    εἰς καλόν S. OT78

    , cf. Pl.Phd. 76e;

    ἐς δέον γεγονέναι Hdt.1.119

    , cf. S.OT 1416, and v. δέον.
    V ofan end or limit, ἔρχεσθαι, τελευτᾶν, λήγειν ἐς.., to end in.., Hdt.1.120,3.125,4.39, etc.;

    ἐς ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα ου,ρον ἀνθρώπῳ προτίθημι Id.1.32

    ; καταξαίνειν ἐς φοινικίδα to cut into red rags, Ar.Ach. 320 (troch.);

    στρέφειν τι εἰς αἷμα Apoc.11.6

    ; εἰς ἄνδρας ἐκ μειρακίων τελευτᾶν, εἰς ἄνδρα γενειᾶν, Pl.Tht. 173b, Theoc.14.28;

    ἐκτρέφειν τὸ σπέρμα εἰς καρπόν X.Oec.17.10

    : so with εἶναι or γίγνομαι to form a predicate,

    ἔσται εἰς ἔθνη LXXGe.17.16

    ; ἐγενήθη εἰς γυναῖκα ib.20.12; πιστὸς (sc.ἦν) εἰς προφήτην ib.IKi.3.20;

    ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον Ev.Luc.13.19

    ,al.
    2 of Purpose or Object, εἰπεῖν εἰς ἀγαθόν, πείσεται εἰς ἀγαθόν, for good, for his good, Il.9.102,11.789;

    εἰς ἀγαθὰ μυθεῖσθαι 23.305

    ;

    ἐς πόλεμον θωρήξομαι 8.376

    , cf. Hdt.7.29, etc.; ἐς φόβον to cause fear, Il.15.310;

    ἐς ὑποδήματα δεδόσθαι Hdt.2.98

    ;

    κόσμος ὁ εἰς ἑορτάς X.Oec.9.6

    ;

    ἐπιτηδεότατος, εὐπρεπής, ἔς τι Hdt.1.115

    ,2.116; εἰς κάλλος ζῆν to live for show, X.Cyr.8.1.33, cf. Ages. 9.1;

    ἐς δαίτην ἐκάλεσσε Call.Aet.1.1.5

    ;

    εἰς κέρδος τι δρᾶν S.Ph.

    III;

    πάσας φωνὰς ἱέντων εἰς ἀπόφυξιν Ar.V. 562

    ;

    εἰς γράμματα παιδὶ δεκετεῖ ἐνιαυτοὶ τρεῖς Pl.Lg. 809e

    ; εἰς τὸ πρᾶγμα εἶναι to be pertinent, to the purpose, D.36.54; freq. of expenditure on an object, IG22.102.11, 116.41, al.;

    ἐς τὸ δέον Ar.Nu. 859

    , etc.; ἐς δᾷδα ib. 612.
    B POSITION: εἰς is sts. parted from its acc. by several words,

    εἰς ἀμφοτέρω Διομήδεος ἅρματα βήτην Il.8.115

    ;

    εἰς δὲ μονάρχου δῆμος ἀϊδρίῃ δουλοσύνην ἔπεσεν Sol.9

    : seldom (only in Poets) put after its case, Il.15.59, Od.3.137,15.541, S.OC 126(lyr.): after an Adv.,

    αὔριον ἔς· τῆμος δὲ.. Od.7.318

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰς

  • 11 acostumbrar

    v.
    1 to use to, to be accustomed to, to be in the habit of, to be wont to.
    Acostumbro beber mucha agua I am accustomed to drinking a lot of water.
    2 to accustom, to habituate, to wont.
    Ella acostumbró a Ricardo a su comida She accustomed Richard to her food.
    3 to use to have.
    Ella acostumbraba un té a mediodía She used to have tea at noon.
    4 to condition, to make accustomed, to adapt, to break in.
    Su perseverancia acostumbró a todos Her perseverance conditioned everybody.
    5 to familiarize.
    El contacto constante lo familiarizó Constant contact familiarized him.
    * * *
    1 (habituar) to accustom to
    2 (soler) to be in the habit of
    1 (habituarse) to become accustomed (a, to), get used (a, to)
    * * *
    verb
    * * *
    1.
    VT
    2.
    VI

    acostumbrar (a) hacer algo — to be used o accustomed to doing sth, be in the habit of doing sth

    3.
    See:
    ACOSTUMBRAR ► La forma pronominal acostumbrarse a hacer algo se traduce al inglés por get used to + ((-ing)): Te acostumbrarás a trabajar aquí You'll get used to working here Con el tiempo me acostumbré a estar sin él In time I got used to being without him ► La expresión estar acostumbrado a hacer algo se traduce por to be used to + ((-ing)): Está acostumbrado a levantarse temprano He's used to getting up early Otra forma de traducir esta estructura al inglés es con la construcción to be accustomed to + ((-ing)), aunque tiene un registro formal: Está acostumbrado a levantarse temprano He is accustomed to getting up early ► Cuando el verbo acostumbrar equivale a soler, se puede traducir de dos formas distintas en inglés, dependiendo de si la acción a la que se refiere ocurre en el pasado o en el presente. ► En el {pasado}, lo traducimos por used to + ((infinitivo)): Cuando era niña acostumbraba a rezar todas las noches When I was a child I used to pray every night El año pasado acostumbrábamos a vernos todos los viernes Last year we used to meet every Friday ► En el {presente} se traduce por el adverbio usually + ((presente simple)): Los domingos acostumbro a levantarme tarde I usually get up late on Sundays Para otros usos y ejemplos ver la entrada
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo

    acostumbrar a alguien a algo/+ inf — to get somebody used to something/-ing

    2.

    acostumbrar a + inf — to be accustomed to -ing, be in the habit of -ing

    acostumbraba a dar un paseo después de comer — I used to go for a walk after lunch, I was accustomed to o in the habit of going for a walk after lunch

    3.

    acostumbrarse a algo/alguien — to get used to something/somebody

    acostumbrarse a + inf — to get used to -ing

    * * *
    = accustom, wean, acclimatise [acclimatize, -USA].
    Ex. To the critics of Panizzi, accustomed to the simplicity of the finding catalog, 'the whole volume' represented 'a magnificent mistake'.
    Ex. Classes which are not accustomed to the practice of silent reading will need weaning.
    Ex. Listening to stories, poems, nursery rhymes, nonsense, while occupied with a loved adult in a comforting activity, acclimatizes the infant to the rhythms of prose and poetry.
    ----
    * acostumbrarse = become + adept, inure.
    * acostumbrarse a = get + a feel for, live with, get used to.
    * acostumbrarse a las cosas = get (back) into + the swings of things, things + grow on + Pronombre.
    * acostumbrarse a manejar Algo = get + the hang of.
    * acostumbrarse a una idea = get used to + idea, deal with + concept.
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo

    acostumbrar a alguien a algo/+ inf — to get somebody used to something/-ing

    2.

    acostumbrar a + inf — to be accustomed to -ing, be in the habit of -ing

    acostumbraba a dar un paseo después de comer — I used to go for a walk after lunch, I was accustomed to o in the habit of going for a walk after lunch

    3.

    acostumbrarse a algo/alguien — to get used to something/somebody

    acostumbrarse a + inf — to get used to -ing

    * * *
    = accustom, wean, acclimatise [acclimatize, -USA].

    Ex: To the critics of Panizzi, accustomed to the simplicity of the finding catalog, 'the whole volume' represented 'a magnificent mistake'.

    Ex: Classes which are not accustomed to the practice of silent reading will need weaning.
    Ex: Listening to stories, poems, nursery rhymes, nonsense, while occupied with a loved adult in a comforting activity, acclimatizes the infant to the rhythms of prose and poetry.
    * acostumbrarse = become + adept, inure.
    * acostumbrarse a = get + a feel for, live with, get used to.
    * acostumbrarse a las cosas = get (back) into + the swings of things, things + grow on + Pronombre.
    * acostumbrarse a manejar Algo = get + the hang of.
    * acostumbrarse a una idea = get used to + idea, deal with + concept.

    * * *
    vt
    acostumbrar a algn A algo to get sb used TO sth
    para acostumbrarlo al ruido de los motores to get him used to o accustomed to the noise of the engines
    lo acostumbraron a tomarlo or a que lo tomara desde pequeño they got him used to taking it o into the habit of taking it from when he was small
    ■ acostumbrar
    vi
    acostumbrar ( A) + INF to be accustomed TO -ING, be in the habit OF -ING
    acostumbraba (a) dar un paseo después de comer I usually went for o I used to go for a walk after lunch, I was in the habit of o I was accustomed to going for a walk after lunch
    acostumbrarse A algo/algn to get used TO sth/sb
    se acostumbró muy pronto al nuevo horario she very quickly got used to the new schedule
    acostumbrarse A + INF to get used TO -ING
    no me puedo acostumbrar a comer sin sal I can't get used to eating food without salt
    * * *

     

    acostumbrar ( conjugate acostumbrar) verbo transitivo acostumbrar a algn a algo/hacer algo to get sb used to sth/doing sth
    verbo intransitivo: acostumbrar a hacer algo to be accustomed to doing sth, be in the habit of doing sth
    acostumbrarse verbo pronominal acostumbrarse a algo/algn to get used to sth/sb;
    acostumbrarse a hacer algo to get used to doing sth
    acostumbrar
    I vi (tener por costumbre) to be in the habit of: acostumbra a contar cuanto le sucede, he's in the habit of telling everything that happens to him
    acostumbramos a comer a las dos, we usually have lunch at two o'clock
    II vtr (inculcar un hábito) to get (somebody) used [a, to]: acostumbró a su hija a dormir la siesta, she got her daughter used to taking a siesta
    ' acostumbrar' also found in these entries:
    English:
    accustom
    - use to
    * * *
    ♦ vt
    acostumbrar a alguien a algo to get sb used to sth;
    acostumbrar a alguien a hacer algo to get sb used to doing sth
    ♦ vi
    acostumbrar (a) hacer algo to be in the habit of doing sth;
    acostumbra (a) trabajar los sábados he usually works on Saturdays
    * * *
    I v/t get used (a to)
    II v/i
    :
    acostumbraba a venir a este café todas las mañanas he used to come to this café every morning
    * * *
    : to accustom
    : to be accustomed, to be in the habit

    Spanish-English dictionary > acostumbrar

  • 12 φρήν

    φρήν, ἡ, gen. φρενός, pl. φρένες, gen. φρενῶν, dat. φρεσί: older dat. pl. φρασί ([etym.] ν) IG12.971 (vi B. C.), Pi.N.3.62, BMus.Inscr.909 (Halic., i B. C.): (v. sub fin.):
    I midriff,

    κραδία φρένα λακτίζει A.Pr. 881

     (anap.); elsewh. always in pl.,

    ἔνθα φρένες ἔρχαται ἀμφ' ἁδινὸν κῆρ Il.16.481

    , cf. Hp. VM22, Art.41; τὰς φρένας διάφραγμα εἰς τὸ μέσον αὐτῶν (sc. τοῦ θώρακος καὶ τοῦ κύτους)

    τιθέντες Pl.Ti. 70a

    ;

    τοῦτο δὲ τὸ διάζωμα καλοῦσί τινες φρένας, ὃ διορίζει τόν τε πλεύμονα καὶ τὴν καρδίαν Arist.PA 672b11

    , cf. HA 496b11, 506a6; also, in Hom., more vaguely,

    πρὸς στῆθος ὅθι φρένες ἧπαρ ἔχουσι Od.9.301

    ;

    μένεος φρένες ἀμφὶ μέλαιναι πίμπλαντ' Il.1.103

    , al.;

    φρένας.. εἰς αὐτὰς τυπείς A.Pr. 363

    , cf. Eu. 159 (lyr.).
    2 heart, as seat of the passions, e.g. of fear,

    τρομέοντο δέ οἱ φρένες ἐντός Il.10.10

    ; of joy and grief,

    φρένα τέρπεσθαι φόρμιγγι 9.186

    ;

    γάνυται φρένα ποιμήν 13.493

    ;

    τί σε φρένας ἵκετοπένθος; 1.362

    ;

    ἄχος πύκασε φρένας 8.124

    ;

    ἔρως φρένας ἀμφεκάλυψε 3.442

    ; of anger, Od.6.147; of courage,

    ἕνα φρεσὶ θυμὸν ἔχοντες Il. 13.487

    ;

    ἐς φρένα θυμὸς ἀγέρθη 22.475

    , cf. 8.202, etc.; of bodily appetites, such as hunger, etc., 11.89: the shades of the dead are without it,

    ψυχὴ καὶ εἴδωλον, ἀτὰρ φρένες οὐκ ἔνι πάμπαν 23.104

     (exc. the shade of Teiresias, Od.10.493): so generally in Poets,

    φρενὸς ἔνδοθεν ἄλγεα κεῖται Sol.

     ap. Arist.Ath.5.2;

    κῆλα δαιμόνων θέλγει φρένας Pi.P.1.12

    ;

    φόβος μ' ἔχει φρένας A.Supp. 379

    ;

    μαινομένα φρενί Id.Th. 484

     (lyr.);

    στυγεῖν μιᾷ φρενί Id.Eu. 986

     (lyr.);

    Διὸς γὰρ δυσπαραίτητοι φ. Id.Pr.34

    ; ἐκ φρενός from one's very heart, ὁ ἐκ φρενὸς λόγος a sincere speech, Id.Ch. 107;

    ἐτύμως δακρυχέων ἐκ φρενός Id.Th. 919

     (lyr.); οὐκ ἀπ' ἄκρας φρενός not superficially and carelessly, Id.Ag. 805 (anap.); φρενὸς ἐκ φιλίας ib. 1515 (anap.), cf. 546; φῦσαι φρένας to produce a haughty spirit, S.El. 1463.
    3 mind, as seat of the mental faculties, perception, thought,

    ἔγνω ᾗσιν ἐνὶ φ. Il.22.296

    ;

    μή μοι ταῦτα νόει φρεσί 9.600

    ; μετὰ φρεσὶ μερμηρίξαι, βάλλεσθαι, Od.10.438, Il.9.434;

    ἴδμεν ἐνὶ φρεσίν 2.301

    ; τῷ γὰρ ἐπὶ φρεσί θῆκε put in his mind, suggested it, 1.55;

    σφῶϊν δ' ὧδε θεῶν τις ἐνὶ φρεσὶ ποιήσειεν 13.55

    ; ἐν φρεσὶ θέσθε ἕκαστος ib. 121, cf. 1.297, etc.; φρένας παραπεῖσαι, πείθειν, 7.120, 16.842; ἐπιγνάμπτει φρένας (v.l. for νόον)

    ἐσθλῶν 9.514

    ;

    Διὸς ἐτράπετο φρήν 10.45

    ; ἀνὴρ φρένας ἀφνειός rich (only) in his imagination, Hes.Op. 455; ὀρθᾷ, ἐλευθέρᾳ φρενί, Pi.O.8.24, P.2.57;

    φρένες γὰρ αὐτοῦ θυμὸν ᾠακοστρόφουν A.Pers. 767

    ;

    ἡ γλῶσσ' ὀμώμοχ', ἡ δὲ φ. ἀνώμοτος E.Hipp. 612

    ;

    κατὰ φρένα καὶ κατὰ θυμόν Il.1.193

    , al.: pl., wits,

    Κύκλωπα περὶ φρένας ἤλυθε οἶνος Od.9.362

    , cf. 454, 18.331;

    πλήγη φρένας ἂς πάρος εἶχεν Il.13.394

    ;

    ἐκ γὰρ πλήγη φρένας 16.403

    ;

    βλάπτε φρένας Ζεὺς ἡμετέρας 15.724

    ;

    ἐξ... τοι θεοὶ φρένας ὤλεσαν 7.360

    ; φρένας ἄφρων, φρένας ἠλέ or ἠλεέ, 4.104, 15.128, Od.2.243: of losing one's wits, φρενῶν ἀφεστάναι, ἐκστῆναι, μεθεστάναι, S.Ph. 865, E.Or. 1021, Ba. 944;

    τὰς φ. ἐκβάλλειν S.Ant. 648

    ;

    ἔξω φρενῶν Pi.O.7.47

    ;

    φρενῶν οὐκ ἔνδον ὤν E.Heracl. 709

    ;

    φρενῶν κεκομμένος A.Ag. 479

     (lyr.);

    κενός S.Ant. 754

    ;

    τητώμενοι Id.El. 1326

    ; ἔξεδροι, παράκοποι, E.Hipp. 935, Ba.33;

    ποῦ ποτ' εἶ φρενῶν; S.El. 390

    ;

    φρένες διάστροφοι A.Pr. 673

    , S.Aj. 447;

    μαργότης φρενῶν Id.Fr. 846

    ;

    ἀνακίνησις φρενῶν Id.OT 727

    , etc.; of persons in their senses,

    ἐπήβολος φρενῶν Id.Ant. 492

    ;

    ἀνδρὸς νοῦν ἔχοντος καὶ φρένας Ar.Ra. 535

     (lyr.) (so in later Prose,

    οἱ φρένας ἔχοντες Phld.Po.5.19

    , Rh.1.240S.; οἱ τῶν σοφιστῶν τὰς κοινὰς φ. ἔχοντες ib.202S.); also

    ἔσω φρενῶν λέγειν A.Ag. 1052

    ;

    γράφου φρενῶν ἔσω S.Ph. 1325

    ;

    τῆς λεπτότητος τῶν φ. Ar.Nu. 153

    ; φρένες, opp. σῶμα, Hdt.3.134; so

    αἱ σάρκες αἱ κεναὶ φρενῶν E.El. 387

    ; attributed to animals,

    μετὰ φρεσὶ γίγνεται ἀλκή Il.4.245

    , cf. 16.157, etc.—The word is not common in early Prose,

    τίς αὐτῶν νόος ἢ φρήν; Heraclit.104

    ; συμφορὰ τῶν φ., i.e. madness, And.2.7;

    παραλλάττει τῶν φ. Lys.Fr.90

    ;

    καρποῦ μὲν ἀφθονία φρενῶν δὲ ἀφορία X.Smp.4.55

    ;

    νοῦς καὶ φρένες D.18.324

    , cf. 25.33.
    4 will, purpose,

    οὔ τι Διὸς βέομαι φρεσίν Il.15.194

    ;

    σῆς ἀπεστάτουν φ. S.Ant. 993

    , cf.OC 1182.—In usage there is little or no distinction observable between sg. and pl., but the sg. is not found in Prose (exc. Heraclit. l.c.) or Com. (exc. in paratrag., Ar. Ra. 886).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > φρήν

  • 13 ἱκνέομαι

    ἱκνέομαι, lengthd. form of ἵκω (q. v.), ἱκάνω, wh. are the Homeric forms of the [tense] pres. (exc. ἱκνεύμεναι, ἱκνεύμεσθα, Od.9.128, 24.339), first in Alc.98 (s. v.l.): [tense] impf.
    A

    ἱκνεῖτο S.OC 970

    : [tense] fut.

    ἵξομαι Il.6.502

    , Parm. 3.2, A.Supp. 159 (lyr.); [dialect] Dor.

    ἱξοῦμαι AP9.341

     (Glauc.): [tense] aor. 2

    ἱκόμην Il.8.149

    , etc.; inf.

    ἴκεσθαι Sapph.Supp.1.2

     [[pron. full] ῐ, exc. when lengthd. by the augm.]; for part. ἴκμενος v. sub voce: [tense] pf.

    ἷγμαι S.Tr. 229

    , part.

    ἱγμένος Id.Ph. 494

    : non-thematic [tense] aor. 2

    ἷκτο Hes.Th. 481

    , [Simon.] 179.4, Euph.2: ( ἀφικνέομαι is used in early Prose, exc. in signf. 111; ἵκοντο is f.l. in Th.5.40, ἵκηται is a poet. reminiscence in Pl.Phdr. 276d; but ἵκετο is found in Hdt.1.216,

    ἵκηται Hp.Loc.Hom. 47

    ; also in later Prose, Luc.Salt.5, DDeor.6.4, Procop.Pers.1.4, 2.21):— come,

    αἶψα δ' ἵκοντο Il.18.532

    ; ὁπότε Κρήτηθεν ἵκοιτο when he came to us.., 3.233; ὑπότροπον οἴκαδ' ἱ. Od.22.35;

    ἐς χῶρον Il.4.446

    ;

    ἐπὶ νῆας 6.69

    ;

    κατὰ λειμῶνα Od.24.13

    ;

    πρὸς γούνατα Hes.Th. 460

    ;

    ὑπὸ πτόλιν Il.11.182

    ;

    εἰς ὁμόν Parm.8.46

    ;

    πρὸς ὁμοῖον Emp.62.6

    ;

    τυῖδ' ἴκεσθαι Sapph.

     l.c.: freq. in Hom., c. acc., arrive at,

    ἵκετο νῆας Il.8.149

    ;

    τέλος ἵκεο μύθων 9.56

    ;

    οἶκον.. καὶ σὴν ἐς πατρίδα γαῖαν Od.23.258

    ; later

    ἱκέσθαι γαῖαν Pi.P.4.118

     codd.;

    βένθος Emp.35.3

    ;

    ἄλσος A.Supp. 556

     (lyr.);

    στέγας S.OT 534

    , etc.
    2 reach, attain to, ποσὶν οὖδας ἱ. Od.8.376; οὐδ' ἵκετο χρόα καλόν, of a spear, Il.11.352;

    οὐδ' ὀστέον ἵκετο Od.19.451

     (v. ὑπερίημι); so of things, ἠχή, καπνὸς αἰθέρ' ἱ., Il.13.837, 18.207;

    ἔμπης ἐς γαῖάν τε καὶ οὐρανὸν ἵκετ' ἀϋτμή 14.174

    ;

    ἐς πόλιν ἵκετ' ἀϋτή Od.14.265

    ; of Time, ἥβης μέτρον or ἥβην ἱ., Il.11.225, 24.728, etc.;

    γήραος οὐδόν Od.15.246

    ; so

    ἐπὶ γῆρας 8.227

    ; ἠῶ ἱ. live till morn, 17.497; also ὀλέθρου πείραθ' ἱ. Il.6.143;

    λέκτροιο παλαιοῦ θεσμὸν ἵκοντο Od.23.296

    , cf. 354; θίλην ἐπὶ γένναν ἵ. Emp. 110.9;

    ἐς ἄπειρον Xenoph.28

    ;

    ἐς τὸ τυθῆναι Hdt.1.216

    ;

    εἰς τὸ λήθης γῆρας Pl.Phdr.

     l.c.:—in various phrases, ἱ. μετὰ κλέος come in quest of glory, Il.11.227; ἐς χεῖρας ἱ. come into one's power, 10.448; ὅ τι χεῖρας ἵκοιτο whatever came to hand, Od.12.331; ἱ. ἐς γενεάν τινος into his family, Pi.N.10.14; ἐς λόγους τοὺς σοὺς ἱ. to speak with thee, S.El. 315; ἐνθάδ' ἵξομαι shall come to this at last, Id.Aj. 1365; ἤν ποτε δασμὸς ἵκηται if ever a division come about, Il.1.166.
    II with a person as object, τινα ib. 139, etc.;

    ἔς τινα Od. 6.176

    ; but also, come to his house, 20.372; Πηλεΐωνάδ' ἵ. to the hut of the son of P., Il.24.338; μετὰ Τρῶας ἱ. 3.264: rarely c. dat., ἐπειγομένοισι δ' ἵκοντο came to them at need, 12.374; cf.

    ἱκάνω 11

    .
    3 approach as suppliant,

    τὴν ἱκόμην φεύγων 14.260

    , cf. 22.123;

    τὰ σὰ γοῦνα ἱκόμεθ' Od.9.267

    ;

    θεοὺς προστροπαῖς ἱκνουμένη A.Pers. 216

     (troch.);

    Ζῆνα.. ἱξόμεσθα σὺν κλάδοις Id.Supp. 159

     (lyr.); [θεὸν] θυέεσσιν ἱκνεῖσθαι approach a god with offerings and prayer, Theoc.Ep.8.3.
    b Poet. in [tense] pres., supplicate, beseech,

    τάσδε τὰς θεὰς καλῶν ἱκνοῦμαι S.OC 1011

    ;

    καί σε πρὸς τοῦ σοῦ τέκνου καὶ θεῶν ἱκνοῦμαι μή.. Id.Aj. 588

    , cf. OC 275, Ph. 470; ταύτης ἱκνοῦμαί ς' E.Or. 671: c. inf.,

    πάντες σ' ἱκνοῦνται.. θάψαι νεκρούς Id.Supp. 130

    : freq. parenthetic, S.Ph. 932, El. 136 (lyr.), Ar.Ec. 958, Tim.Pers. 139.
    III [tense] pres. and [tense] impf., it becomes, befits, pertains to, c. acc. et inf.,

    φαμὲν ἡμέας ἱκνέεσθαι ἡγεμονεύειν Hdt.9.26

    ; τοὺς μάλιστα ἱκνέεται (sc. κεκάρθαι) Id.2.36; ἱκνέεται it is usual that.., Hp.Art.63; later, not impers.,

    οὗ ἡ ἱερουργία ἱκνεῖτο D.C.Fr.25.5

    ;

    ὅ[σα τᾶς δίκας ἱ] κνεῖται SIG953.46

     (Cnidos, ii B.C.).
    b αὐτὸς καὶ ὧν ἱκνεῖται, of a man and those to whom he belongs, i.e. his family, ib.46.25, al. (Halic.).
    2 freq. in part., τὸ ἱκνεύμενον that which is fitting, proper, Hdt.6.84; ὁ ἱ., with or without χρόνος, the fit, proper time, Hp.Aër.7, Hdt.6.86.ά; ἐν ἱκνουμένᾳ ἁμέρᾳ Orac. ap. D.43.66; τὸ ἱ. ἀνάλωμα the quota of expense, Th.1.99;

    κατὰ τοὺς ἱ. χρόνους Arist.GA 750b13

     (also of the latter days, D.H. 1.66);

    ἱ. καιροί Thphr.CP1.13.3

    ;

    τὰ -ούμενα μεγέθη Arist.GA 772a8

    ;

    ἡ ἱ. ἐπιστήμη Id.Pol. 1288b16

    ; τῆς ἱ. ἡλικίας τυχεῖν ib. 1332b41; also ἱκνούμεναι ἀποδείξεις convincing proofs, Phld.Piet.79; οὐδὲν εἴρηται ἱ. S.E.M.1.205; λόγος τινὶ ἱκνούμενος favourable, SIG679.77 (Magn. Mae., ii B.C.). Adv. ἱκνουμένως, [dialect] Ion. - ευμένως, fittingly, aright, Hdt. 6.65, Hp.Mul.2.135, M.Ant.5.12.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἱκνέομαι

  • 14 ALIN

    (gen. sing. alnar or álnar; pl. alnar or álnir), f. = öln;
    1) the old Icelandic ell (about half a yard);
    2) unit of value, an ell of woollen stuff (alin vaðmáls), = one sixth of an ounce(eyrir).
    * * *
    f. A dissyllabic form alun appears in old poetry, v. Lex. Poët. In early prose writers a monosyllabic form öln prevails in nom. dat. acc. sing., D. I. i. 310. l. 22 (MS. of the year 1275), 314. l. 16 (MS. year 1250), 311, 312. l. 16, 313. l. 7, 89. l. 1. Nom. pl., α. the old, alnar; β. the later, alnir: the former in -ar, in D. I. i. 309 (a MS. of the year 1275), 310–312 (MS. year 1370), 313, 316. l. 19, 318. 1. 15. The pl. in -ir, D. I. i. 89 sqq., in MSS. of the 13th and 14th centuries. In the contracted form aln- the simple radical vowel soon became a diphthongal á, viz. álnar, álnir, álnum, álna, and is at present so spelt and pronounced. We find an acute accent indeed in álna (gen pl.), D. I. i. 313. l. 25 (MS. year 1375), and dinar, id. l, 7; álnom, 1. 28; ölnum with changed vowel, N. G. L. i. 323 (in an Icel. transcript). The present declension is, nom. acc. alin, gen. álnar; pl. nom. acc. álnir, gen. álna, dat. alnum.
    I. properly the arm from the elbow to the end of the middle finger [Gr. ώλένη, Lat. ulna, cp. A. S. el-boga, Engl. el-bow, etc.]; almost obsolete, but still found in the words ölbogi qs. öln-bogi, ‘elbow,’ and úlf-liðr, prop. uln- or óln-liðr, wrist, commonly pronounced unl-liðr [false etymol., v. Edda, p. 17]; cp. Ísl. Þjóðs. ii. 19, where tungl (luna) and unl- rhyme. Freq. in poetry in such compounds as alun-leygr, -brandr, ölun-grjót, alnar-gim, alin-leygr, the standing poët, name of gold and gems being ignis or lapis cubiti.
    II. mostly metaph.:
    1. an ell, [Ulf. aleina; A. S. eln; Engl. ell; O. H. G. elina; Dan. alen; Lat. ulna, cp. cubitum] ; the finger, arm, foot were the original standards for measure. The primitive ell measured the length from the elbow to the point of the second finger, and answered to about half a yard Engl. = 18 inches. The Icel. ell before the year 12OO measured just half a yard. About this year, by a law of bishop Paul, the ell was doubled into a stika, a stika being precisely = two ells = an Engl. ell of that time. To prevent the use of bad measure, a just and lawful stika (yard) was marked on the walls of the churches, esp. that at Thingvellir, as an authorised standard, Páls S. ch. 9, Bs. i. 135, D. I. i. 309, 316, Jb. Kb. 26; ensk lérept tveggja álna, English linen of two ells measure, id.; þat er mælt, at at graftar kirkju hverri skal mæla stiku lengd, þá er rétt sé at hafa til álna máls, ok megi menn þar til ganga ef á skilr um alnar, 309. During the whole of the 15th century the Icel. trade was mainly in British hands; thus the Engl. double ell probably prevailed till the end of the 15th or beginning of the 16th century. The Hanse Towns ell = 21 1/11 inches was then introduced, and abolished in the year 1776, when the Dan. ell = 24 inches came into use. At present the Hanse Towns ell is called Íslenzk alin (Icel. ell), and the original half-yard ell is quite obsolete; cp. Jón Sigurðsson in D. I. i. 306–308, and Pál Vidal. s. v. alin.
    2. a unit of value, viz. an ell (half-yard measure) of woollen stuff (vaðmál); the vaðmál (Halliwell wadmal, Engl. woadmal, Orkn. and Shell, wadmaal and vadmel) was in Icel. the common medium of payment, whence an ell became the standard unit of value or property, whether in land or chattels; 120 ells make a hundred, v. that word. In D. I. i. 316 we are told that, about the year 1200, three ells were equal in value to one ounce of ordinary silver, whence the expression þriggja álna eyrir (a common phrase during the 13th century). The value of the ell of vaðmal, however, varied greatly; during the 11th and 12th centuries six ells made an ounce, D. I. i. 88. In Norway we find mentioned níu, ellifu álna aurar (nine, eleven ells to an ounce). In Grág. (Kb.) ii. 192, § 245, it is said that, about the year 1000, four ells in Icel. made an ounce, and so on; vide Dasent, Essay in 2nd vol. of Burnt Njal., and Pal Vidal. s. v. alin.
    COMPDS: álnarborð, álnarbreiðr, alnarkefli, álnartíund, álnarvirði, álnasök.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > ALIN

  • 15 primitivo

    adj.
    1 primitive, primal, aboriginal, original.
    2 primitive, gut, primary.
    3 primitive, crude, lacking refinement.
    m.
    1 primitive.
    2 Primitivo.
    * * *
    1 HISTORIA primitive
    2 (original) original
    * * *
    (f. - primitiva)
    adj.
    * * *
    ADJ
    1) [arte, pueblo] primitive; (=salvaje) uncivilized
    2) (=original) first, original
    3) [color] primary
    4) (Econ) [acción] ordinary
    * * *
    - va adjetivo
    2) ( original) original
    3) (Art) primitive
    * * *
    = primitive, uncivilised [uncivilized, -USA], barbaric, raw, pristine, primordial.
    Ex. Primitive war dances, fertility rites, hunting games are all rituals human beings develop in their corporate as well as their private lives.
    Ex. It was on the tip of his tongue to say: 'Must you speak to me in this uncivilized fashion?' But he discreetly forbore.
    Ex. The novel is a crude barbaric mixture of verse and prose, poetry and realism, crammed with ghosts, corpses, maniacs all very unlike Racine.
    Ex. Vegetable fibres in their raw state contain the necessary strands of cellulose which can be converted into paper.
    Ex. Although national parks are perceived as pristine areas, many are dumping grounds for hazardous materials - everything from industrial toxins to unexploded munitions.
    Ex. The author examines key passages in the 1941 Nietzsche lectures where Heidegger appears to flirt with the possibility of a more primordial sense of existence.
    ----
    * hombre primitivo, el = early man.
    * impulso primitivo = primitive urge.
    * * *
    - va adjetivo
    2) ( original) original
    3) (Art) primitive
    * * *
    = primitive, uncivilised [uncivilized, -USA], barbaric, raw, pristine, primordial.

    Ex: Primitive war dances, fertility rites, hunting games are all rituals human beings develop in their corporate as well as their private lives.

    Ex: It was on the tip of his tongue to say: 'Must you speak to me in this uncivilized fashion?' But he discreetly forbore.
    Ex: The novel is a crude barbaric mixture of verse and prose, poetry and realism, crammed with ghosts, corpses, maniacs all very unlike Racine.
    Ex: Vegetable fibres in their raw state contain the necessary strands of cellulose which can be converted into paper.
    Ex: Although national parks are perceived as pristine areas, many are dumping grounds for hazardous materials - everything from industrial toxins to unexploded munitions.
    Ex: The author examines key passages in the 1941 Nietzsche lectures where Heidegger appears to flirt with the possibility of a more primordial sense of existence.
    * hombre primitivo, el = early man.
    * impulso primitivo = primitive urge.

    * * *
    A ‹pueblo/costumbres› primitive; ‹instalaciones/métodos› primitive
    los hombres primitivos primitive o early man
    trabajan en condiciones primitivas they work in primitive conditions
    B (original) original
    el texto primitivo the original text
    C ( Art) primitive
    * * *

    primitivo
    ◊ -va adjetivo

    primitive
    primitivo,-a adjetivo
    1 (civilización, cultura) primitive
    2 (estado originario) original
    la estructura primitiva de la casa, the original structure of the house
    3 (grosero) rude, coarse

    ' primitivo' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    primitiva
    - primario
    - salvaje
    English:
    crude
    - early
    - first
    - primaeval
    - primitive
    - barbaric
    * * *
    primitivo, -a adj
    1. [arcaico, rudimentario] primitive
    2. [original] original
    3. Arte primitivist
    * * *
    adj
    1 ( prehistórico, rudimentario) primitive
    2 ( original) original
    * * *
    primitivo, -va adj
    1) : primitive
    2) original: original
    * * *
    primitivo adj primitive

    Spanish-English dictionary > primitivo

  • 16 ab

    ăb, ā, abs, prep. with abl. This IndoEuropean particle (Sanscr. apa or ava, Etr. av, Gr. upo, Goth. af, Old Germ. aba, New Germ. ab, Engl. of, off) has in Latin the following forms: ap, af, ab (av), au-, a, a; aps, abs, as-. The existence of the oldest form, ap, is proved by the oldest and best MSS. analogous to the prep. apud, the Sanscr. api, and Gr. epi, and by the weakened form af, which, by the rule of historical grammar and the nature of the Latin letter f, can be derived only from ap, not from ab. The form af, weakened from ap, also very soon became obsolete. There are but five examples of it in inscriptions, at the end of the sixth and in the course of the seventh century B. C., viz.:

    AF VOBEIS,

    Inscr. Orell. 3114;

    AF MVRO,

    ib. 6601;

    AF CAPVA,

    ib. 3308;

    AF SOLO,

    ib. 589;

    AF LYCO,

    ib. 3036 ( afuolunt =avolant, Paul. ex Fest. p. 26 Mull., is only a conjecture). In the time of Cicero this form was regarded as archaic, and only here and there used in account-books; v. Cic. Or. 47, 158 (where the correct reading is af, not abs or ab), and cf. Ritschl, Monum. Epigr. p. 7 sq.—The second form of this preposition, changed from ap, was ab, which has become the principal form and the one most generally used through all periods—and indeed the only oue used before all vowels and h; here and there also before some consonants, particularly l, n, r, and s; rarely before c, j, d, t; and almost never before the labials p, b, f, v, or before m, such examples as ab Massiliensibus, Caes. B. C. 1, 35, being of the most rare occurrence.—By changing the b of ab through v into u, the form au originated, which was in use only in the two compounds aufero and aufugio for abfero, ab-fugio; aufuisse for afuisse, in Cod. Medic. of Tac. A. 12, 17, is altogether unusual. Finally, by dropping the b of ab, and lengthening the a, ab was changed into a, which form, together with ab, predominated through all periods of the Latin language, and took its place before all consonants in the later years of Cicero, and after him almoet exclusively.—By dropping the b without lengthening the a, ab occurs in the form a- in the two compounds a-bio and a-perio, q. v.—On the other hand, instead of reducing ap to a and a, a strengthened collateral form, aps, was made by adding to ap the letter s (also used in particles, as in ex, mox, vix). From the first, aps was used only before the letters c, q, t, and was very soon changed into abs (as ap into ab):

    abs chorago,

    Plaut. Pers. 1, 3, 79 (159 Ritschl):

    abs quivis,

    Ter. Ad. 2, 3, 1:

    abs terra,

    Cato, R. R. 51;

    and in compounds: aps-cessero,

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 1, 24 (625 R.); id. ib. 3, 2, 84 (710 R): abs-condo, abs-que, abs-tineo, etc. The use of abs was confined almost exclusively to the combination abs te during the whole ante-classic period, and with Cicero till about the year 700 A. U. C. (=B. C. 54). After that time Cicero evidently hesitates between abs te and a te, but during the last five or six years of his life a te became predominant in all his writings, even in his letters; consequently abs te appears but rarely in later authors, as in Liv. 10, 19, 8; 26, 15, 12;

    and who, perhaps, also used abs conscendentibus,

    id. 28, 37, 2; v. Drakenb. ad. h. l. (Weissenb. ab).—Finally abs, in consequence of the following p, lost its b, and became ds- in the three compounds aspello, as-porto, and as-pernor (for asspernor); v. these words.—The late Lat. verb abbrevio may stand for adbrevio, the d of ad being assimilated to the following b.The fundamental signification of ab is departure from some fixed point (opp. to ad. which denotes motion to a point).
    I.
    In space, and,
    II.
    Fig., in time and other relations, in which the idea of departure from some point, as from source and origin, is included; Engl. from, away from, out of; down from; since, after; by, at, in, on, etc.
    I.
    Lit., in space: ab classe ad urbem tendunt, Att. ap. Non. 495, 22 (Trag. Rel. p. 177 Rib.):

    Caesar maturat ab urbe proficisci,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 7:

    fuga ab urbe turpissima,

    Cic. Att. 7, 21:

    ducite ab urbe domum, ducite Daphnim,

    Verg. E. 8, 68. Cicero himself gives the difference between ab and ex thus: si qui mihi praesto fuerit cum armatis hominibus extra meum fundum et me introire prohibuerit, non ex eo, sed ab ( from, away from) eo loco me dejecerit....Unde dejecti Galli? A Capitolio. Unde, qui cum Graccho fucrunt? Ex Capitolio, etc., Cic. Caecin. 30, 87; cf. Diom. p. 408 P., and a similar distinction between ad and in under ad.—Ellipt.: Diogenes Alexandro roganti, ut diceret, si quid opus esset: Nunc quidem paululum, inquit, a sole, a little out of the sun, Cic. Tusc. 5, 32, 92. —Often joined with usque:

    illam (mulierem) usque a mari supero Romam proficisci,

    all the way from, Cic. Clu. 68, 192; v. usque, I.—And with ad, to denote the space passed over: siderum genus ab ortu ad occasum commeant, from... to, Cic. N. D. 2, 19 init.; cf. ab... in:

    venti a laevo latere in dextrum, ut sol, ambiunt,

    Plin. 2, 47, 48, § 128.
    b.
    Sometimes with names of cities and small islands, or with domus (instead of the usual abl.), partie., in militnry and nautieal language, to denote the marching of soldiers, the setting out of a flcet, or the departure of the inhabitants from some place:

    oppidum ab Aenea fugiente a Troja conditum,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 33:

    quemadmodum (Caesar) a Gergovia discederet,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 43 fin.; so id. ib. 7, 80 fin.; Sall. J. 61; 82; 91; Liv. 2, 33, 6 al.; cf.:

    ab Arimino M. Antonium cum cohortibus quinque Arretium mittit,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 11 fin.; and:

    protinus a Corfinio in Siciliam miserat,

    id. ib. 1, 25, 2:

    profecti a domo,

    Liv. 40, 33, 2;

    of setting sail: cum exercitus vestri numquam a Brundisio nisi hieme summa transmiserint,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 12, 32; so id. Fam. 15, 3, 2; Caes. B. C. 3, 23; 3, 24 fin.:

    classe qua advecti ab domo fuerant,

    Liv. 8, 22, 6;

    of citizens: interim ab Roma legatos venisse nuntiatum est,

    Liv. 21, 9, 3; cf.:

    legati ab Orico ad M. Valerium praetorem venerunt,

    id. 24, 40, 2.
    c.
    Sometimes with names of persons or with pronouns: pestem abige a me, Enn. ap. Cic. Ac. 2, 28, 89 (Trag. v. 50 Vahl.):

    Quasi ad adulescentem a patre ex Seleucia veniat,

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 41; cf.:

    libertus a Fuflis cum litteris ad Hermippum venit,

    Cic. Fl. 20, 47:

    Nigidium a Domitio Capuam venisse,

    id. Att. 7, 24:

    cum a vobis discessero,

    id. Sen. 22:

    multa merces tibi defluat ab Jove Neptunoque,

    Hor. C. 1, 28, 29 al. So often of a person instead of his house, lodging, etc.: videat forte hic te a patre aliquis exiens, from the father, i. e. from his house, Ter. Heaut. 2, 2, 6:

    so a fratre,

    id. Phorm. 5, 1, 5:

    a Pontio,

    Cic. Att. 5, 3 fin.:

    ab ea,

    Ter. And. 1, 3, 21; and so often: a me, a nobis, a se, etc., from my, our, his house, etc., Plaut. Stich. 5, 1, 7; Ter. Heaut. 3, 2, 50; Cic. Att. 4, 9, 1 al.
    B.
    Transf., without the idea of motion. To designate separation or distance, with the verbs abesse, distare, etc., and with the particles longe, procul, prope, etc.
    1.
    Of separation:

    ego te afuisse tam diu a nobis dolui,

    Cic. Fam. 2, 1, 2:

    abesse a domo paulisper maluit,

    id. Verr. 2, 4, 18, § 39:

    tum Brutus ab Roma aberat,

    Sall. C. 40, 5:

    absint lacerti ab stabulis,

    Verg. G. 4, 14.—
    2.
    Of distance:

    quot milia fundus suus abesset ab urbe,

    Cic. Caecin. 10, 28; cf.:

    nos in castra properabamus, quae aberant bidui,

    id. Att. 5, 16 fin.; and:

    hic locus aequo fere spatio ab castris Ariovisti et Caesaris aberat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 43, 1:

    terrae ab hujusce terrae, quam nos incolimus, continuatione distantes,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 66, 164:

    non amplius pedum milibus duobus ab castris castra distabant,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 82, 3; cf. id. lb. 1, 3, 103.—With adverbs: annos multos longinque ab domo bellum gerentes, Enn. ap. Non. 402, 3 (Trag. v. 103 Vahl.):

    cum domus patris a foro longe abesset,

    Cic. Cael. 7, 18 fin.; cf.:

    qui fontes a quibusdam praesidiis aberant longius,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 49, 5:

    quae procul erant a conspectu imperii,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 32, 87; cf.:

    procul a castris hostes in collibus constiterunt,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 17, 1; and:

    tu procul a patria Alpinas nives vides,

    Verg. E. 10, 46 (procul often also with simple abl.;

    v. procul): cum esset in Italia bellum tam prope a Sicilia, tamen in Sicilia non fuit,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 2, § 6; cf.:

    tu apud socrum tuam prope a meis aedibus sedebas,

    id. Pis. 11, 26; and:

    tam prope ab domo detineri,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 3, § 6.—So in Caesar and Livy, with numerals to designate the measure of the distance:

    onerariae naves, quae ex eo loco ab milibus passuum octo vento tenebatur,

    eight miles distant, Caes. B. G. 4, 22, 4; and without mentioning the terminus a quo: ad castra contenderunt, et ab milibus passunm minus duobus castra posuerunt, less than two miles off or distant, id. ib. 2, 7, 3; so id. ib. 2, 5, 32; 6, 7, 3; id. B. C. 1, 65; Liv. 38, 20, 2 (for which:

    duo milia fere et quingentos passus ab hoste posuerunt castra,

    id. 37, 38, 5). —
    3.
    To denote the side or direction from which an object is viewed in its local relations,=a parte, at, on, in: utrum hacin feriam an ab laeva latus? Enn. ap. Plaut. Cist. 3, 10 (Trag. v. 38 Vahl.); cf.:

    picus et cornix ab laeva, corvos, parra ab dextera consuadent,

    Plaut. As. 2, 1, 12: clamore ab ea parte audito. on this side, Caes. B. G. 3, 26, 4: Gallia Celtica attingit ab Sequanis et Helvetiis flumen Rhenum, on the side of the Sequani, i. e. their country, id. ib. 1, 1, 5:

    pleraque Alpium ab Italia sicut breviora ita arrectiora sunt,

    on the Italian side, Liv. 21, 35, 11:

    non eadem diligentia ab decumuna porta castra munita,

    at the main entrance, Caes. B. G. 3, 25 fin.:

    erat a septentrionibus collis,

    on the north, id. ib. 7, 83, 2; so, ab oriente, a meridie, ab occasu; a fronte, a latere, a tergo, etc. (v. these words).
    II.
    Fig.
    A.
    In time.
    1.
    From a [p. 3] point of time, without reference to the period subsequently elapsed. After:

    Exul ab octava Marius bibit,

    Juv. 1,40:

    mulieres jam ab re divin[adot ] adparebunt domi,

    immediately after the sucrifice, Plaut. Poen. 3, 3, 4:

    Caesar ab decimae legionis cohortatione ad dextrum cornu profectus,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 25, 1:

    ab hac contione legati missi sunt,

    immediately after, Liv. 24, 22, 6; cf. id. 28, 33, 1; 40, 47, 8; 40, 49, 1 al.:

    ab eo magistratu,

    after this office, Sall. J. 63, 5:

    a summa spe novissima exspectabat,

    after the greatest hope, Tac. A. 6, 50 fin. —Strengthened by the adverbs primum, confestim, statim, protinus, or the adj. recens, immediately after, soon after:

    ut primum a tuo digressu Romam veni,

    Cic. Att. 1, 5, 4; so Suet. Tib. 68:

    confestim a proelio expugnatis hostium castris,

    Liv. 30, 36, 1:

    statim a funere,

    Suet. Caes. 85;

    and followed by statim: ab itinere statim,

    id. ib. 60:

    protinus ab adoptione,

    Vell. 2, 104, 3:

    Homerus qui recens ab illorum actate fuit,

    soon after their time, Cic. N. D. 3, 5; so Varr. R. R. 2, 8, 2; Verg. A. 6, 450 al. (v. also primum, confestim, etc.).—

    Sometimes with the name of a person or place, instead of an action: ibi mihi tuae litterae binae redditae sunt tertio abs te die,

    i. e. after their departure from you, Cic. Att. 5, 3, 1: in Italiam perventum est quinto mense a Carthagine Nov[adot ], i. e. after leaving (=postquam a Carthagine profecti sunt), Liv. 21, 38, 1:

    secundo Punico (bello) Scipionis classis XL. die a securi navigavit,

    i. e. after its having been built, Plin. 16, 39, 74, § 192. —Hence the poct. expression: ab his, after this (cf. ek toutôn), i. e. after these words, hereupon, Ov. M. 3, 273; 4, 329; 8, 612; 9, 764.
    2.
    With reference to a subsequent period. From, since, after:

    ab hora tertia bibebatur,

    from the third hour, Cic. Phil. 2, 41:

    infinito ex tempore, non ut antea, ab Sulla et Pompeio consulibus,

    since the consulship of, id. Agr. 2, 21, 56:

    vixit ab omni aeternitate,

    from all eternity, id. Div. 1, 51, 115:

    cum quo a condiscipulatu vivebat conjunctissime,

    Nep. Att. 5, 3:

    in Lycia semper a terrae motu XL. dies serenos esse,

    after an earthquake, Plin. 2, 96, 98, § 211 al.:

    centesima lux est haec ab interitu P. Clodii,

    since the death of, Cic. Mil. 35, 98; cf.:

    cujus a morte quintus hic et tricesimus annus est,

    id. Sen. 6, 19; and:

    ab incenso Capitolio illum esse vigesumiun annum,

    since, Sall. C. 47, 2:

    diebus triginta, a qua die materia caesa est,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 36.—Sometimes joined with usque and inde:

    quod augures omnes usque ab Romulo decreverunt,

    since the time of, Cic. Vat. 8, 20:

    jam inde ab infelici pugna ceciderant animi,

    from the very beginning of, Liv. 2, 65 fin. —Hence the adverbial expressions ab initio, a principio, a primo, at, in, or from the beginning, at first; v. initium, principium, primus. Likewise ab integro, anew, afresh; v. integer.—Ab... ad, from (a time)... to:

    ab hora octava ad vesperum secreto collocuti sumus,

    Cic. Att. 7, 8, 4; cf.:

    cum ab hora septima ad vesperum pugnatum sit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 26, 2; and:

    a quo tempore ad vos consules anni sunt septingenti octoginta unus,

    Vell. 1, 8, 4; and so in Plautus strengthened by usque:

    pugnata pugnast usque a mane ad vesperum,

    from morning to evening, Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 97; id. Most. 3, 1, 3; 3, 2, 80.—Rarely ab... in: Romani ab sole orto in multum diei stetere in acie, from... till late in the day, Liv. 27, 2, 9; so Col. 2, 10, 17; Plin. 2, 31, 31, § 99; 2, 103, 106, § 229; 4, 12, 26, § 89.
    b.
    Particularly with nouns denoting a time of life:

    qui homo cum animo inde ab ineunte aetate depugnat suo,

    from an early age, from early youth, Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 24; so Cic. Off. 2, 13, 44 al.:

    mihi magna cum co jam inde a pueritia fuit semper famillaritas,

    Ter. Heaut. 1, 2, 9; so,

    a pueritia,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 11, 27 fin.; id. Fam. 5, 8, 4:

    jam inde ab adulescentia,

    Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 16:

    ab adulescentia,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 1:

    jam a prima adulescentia,

    id. Fam. 1, 9, 23:

    ab ineunte adulescentia,

    id. ib. 13, 21, 1; cf.

    followed by ad: usque ad hanc aetatem ab incunte adulescentia,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 20:

    a primis temporibus aetatis,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 3, 3:

    a teneris unguiculis,

    from childhood, id. ib. 1, 6, 2:

    usque a toga pura,

    id. Att. 7, 8, 5:

    jam inde ab incunabulis,

    Liv. 4, 36, 5:

    a prima lanugine,

    Suet. Oth. 12:

    viridi ab aevo,

    Ov. Tr. 4, 10, 17 al.;

    rarely of animals: ab infantia,

    Plin. 10, 63, 83, § 182.—Instead of the nom. abstr. very often (like the Greek ek paioôn, etc.) with concrete substantives: a pucro, ab adulescente, a parvis, etc., from childhood, etc.:

    qui olim a puero parvulo mihi paedagogus fuerat,

    Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 90; so,

    a pausillo puero,

    id. Stich. 1, 3, 21:

    a puero,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 36, 115; id. Fam. 13, 16, 4 (twice) al.:

    a pueris,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; id. de Or. 1, 1, 2 al.:

    ab adulescente,

    id. Quint. 3, 12:

    ab infante,

    Col. 1, 8, 2:

    a parva virgine,

    Cat. 66, 26 al. —Likewise and in the same sense with adject.: a parvo, from a little child, or childhood, Liv. 1, 39, 6 fin.; cf.:

    a parvis,

    Ter. And. 3, 3, 7; Cic. Leg. 2, 4, 9:

    a parvulo,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 8; id. Ad. 1, 1, 23; cf.:

    ab parvulis,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 21, 3:

    ab tenero,

    Col. 5, 6, 20;

    and rarely of animals: (vacca) a bima aut trima fructum ferre incipit,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 1, 13.
    B.
    In other relations in which the idea of going forth, proceeding, from something is included.
    1.
    In gen. to denote departure, separation, deterring, avoiding, intermitting, etc., or distance, difference, etc., of inanimate or abstract things. From: jus atque aecum se a malis spernit procul, Enn. ap. Non. 399, 10 (Trag. v. 224 Vahl.):

    suspitionem et culpam ut ab se segregent,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 42:

    qui discessum animi a corpore putent esse mortem,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 9, 18:

    hic ab artificio suo non recessit,

    id. ib. 1, 10, 20 al.:

    quod si exquiratur usque ab stirpe auctoritas,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 180:

    condicionem quam ab te peto,

    id. ib. 2, 4, 87; cf.:

    mercedem gloriae flagitas ab iis, quorum, etc.,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 15, 34:

    si quid ab illo acceperis,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 90:

    quae (i. e. antiquitas) quo propius aberat ab ortu et divina progenie,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 12, 26:

    ab defensione desistere,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 12, 4:

    ne quod tempus ab opere intermitteretur,

    id. B. G. 7, 24, 2:

    ut homines adulescentis a dicendi studio deterream,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 25, 117, etc.—Of distance (in order, rank, mind, or feeling):

    qui quartus ab Arcesila fuit,

    the fourth in succession from, Cic. Ac. 1, 12, 46:

    tu nunc eris alter ab illo,

    next after him, Verg. E. 5, 49; cf.:

    Aiax, heros ab Achille secundus,

    next in rank to, Hor. S. 2, 3, 193:

    quid hoc ab illo differt,

    from, Cic. Caecin. 14, 39; cf.:

    hominum vita tantum distat a victu et cultu bestiarum,

    id. Off. 2, 4, 15; and:

    discrepare ab aequitate sapientiam,

    id. Rep. 3, 9 fin. (v. the verbs differo, disto, discrepo, dissideo, dissentio, etc.):

    quae non aliena esse ducerem a dignitate,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 7:

    alieno a te animo fuit,

    id. Deiot. 9, 24 (v. alienus). —So the expression ab re (qs. aside from the matter, profit; cf. the opposite, in rem), contrary to one's profit, to a loss, disadvantageous (so in the affirmative very rare and only ante-class.):

    subdole ab re consulit,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 1, 12; cf. id. Capt. 2, 2, 88; more frequently and class. (but not with Cicero) in the negative, non, haud, ab re, not without advantage or profit, not useless or unprofitable, adcantageous:

    haut est ab re aucupis,

    Plaut. As. 1, 3, 71:

    non ab re esse Quinctii visum est,

    Liv. 35, 32, 6; so Plin. 27, 8, 35; 31, 3, 26; Suet. Aug. 94; id. Dom. 11; Gell. 18, 14 fin.; App. Dogm. Plat. 3, p. 31, 22 al. (but in Ter. Ad. 5, 3, 44, ab re means with respect to the money matter).
    2.
    In partic.
    a.
    To denote an agent from whom an action proceeds, or by whom a thing is done or takes place. By, and in archaic and solemn style, of. So most frequently with pass. or intrans. verbs with pass. signif., when the active object is or is considered as a living being: Laudari me abs te, a laudato viro, Naev. ap. Cic. Tusc. 4, 31, 67: injuria abs te afficior, Enn. ap. Auct. Her. 2, 24, 38:

    a patre deductus ad Scaevolam,

    Cic. Lael. 1, 1:

    ut tamquam a praesentibus coram haberi sermo videretur,

    id. ib. 1, 3:

    disputata ab eo,

    id. ib. 1, 4 al.:

    illa (i. e. numerorum ac vocum vis) maxime a Graecia vetere celebrata,

    id. de Or. 3, 51, 197:

    ita generati a natura sumus,

    id. Off. 1, 29, 103; cf.:

    pars mundi damnata a rerum natura,

    Plin. 4, 12, 26, § 88:

    niagna adhibita cura est a providentia deorum,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 51 al. —With intrans. verbs:

    quae (i. e. anima) calescit ab eo spiritu,

    is warmed by this breath, Cic. N. D. 2, 55, 138; cf. Ov. M. 1, 417: (mare) qua a sole collucet, Cic. Ac. 2, 105:

    salvebis a meo Cicerone,

    i. e. young Cicero sends his compliments to you, id. Att. 6, 2 fin.:

    a quibus (Atheniensibus) erat profectus,

    i. e. by whose command, Nep. Milt. 2, 3:

    ne vir ab hoste cadat,

    Ov. H. 9, 36 al. —A substantive or adjective often takes the place of the verb (so with de, q. v.):

    levior est plaga ab amico quam a debitore,

    Cic. Fam. 9, 16, 7; cf.:

    a bestiis ictus, morsus, impetus,

    id. Off. 2, 6, 19:

    si calor est a sole,

    id. N. D. 2, 52:

    ex iis a te verbis (for a te scriptis),

    id. Att. 16, 7, 5:

    metu poenae a Romanis,

    Liv. 32, 23, 9:

    bellum ingens a Volscis et Aequis,

    id. 3, 22, 2:

    ad exsolvendam fldem a consule,

    id. 27, 5, 6.—With an adj.:

    lassus ab equo indomito,

    Hor. S. 2, 2, 10:

    Murus ab ingenic notior ille tuo,

    Prop. 5, 1, 126:

    tempus a nostris triste malis,

    time made sad by our misfortunes, Ov. Tr. 4, 3, 36.—Different from per:

    vulgo occidebantur: per quos et a quibus?

    by whom and upon whose orders? Cic. Rosc. Am. 29, 80 (cf. id. ib. 34, 97: cujus consilio occisus sit, invenio; cujus manu sit percussus, non laboro); so,

    ab hoc destitutus per Thrasybulum (i. e. Thrasybulo auctore),

    Nep. Alc. 5, 4.—Ambiguity sometimes arises from the fact that the verb in the pass. would require ab if used in the active:

    si postulatur a populo,

    if the people demand it, Cic. Off. 2, 17, 58, might also mean, if it is required of the people; on the contrary: quod ab eo (Lucullo) laus imperatoria non admodum exspectabatur, not since he did not expect military renown, but since they did not expect military renown from him, Cic. Ac. 2, 1, 2, and so often; cf. Rudd. II. p. 213. (The use of the active dative, or dative of the agent, instead of ab with the pass., is well known, Zumpt, § 419. It is very seldom found in prose writers of the golden age of Roman liter.; with Cic. sometimes joined with the participles auditus, cognitus, constitutus, perspectus, provisus, susceptus; cf. Halm ad Cic. Imp. Pomp. 24, 71, and ad ejusdem, Cat. 1, 7 fin.; but freq. at a later period; e. g. in Pliny, in Books 2-4 of H. N., more than twenty times; and likewise in Tacitus seventeen times. Vid. the passages in Nipperd. ad Tac. A. 2, 49.) Far more unusual is the simple abl. in the designation of persons:

    deseror conjuge,

    Ov. H. 12, 161; so id. ib. 5, 75; id. M. 1, 747; Verg. A. 1, 274; Hor. C. 2, 4, 9; 1, 6, 2;

    and in prose,

    Quint. 3, 4, 2; Sen. Contr. 2, 1; Curt. 6, 7, 8; cf. Rudd. II. p. 212; Zumpt ad Quint. V. p. 122 Spalding.—Hence the adverbial phrase a se=uph heautou, sua sponte, of one's own uccord, spontaneously:

    ipsum a se oritur et sua sponte nascitur,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 24, 78:

    (urna) ab se cantat quoja sit,

    Plaut. Rud. 2, 5, 21 (al. eapse; cf. id. Men. 1, 2, 66); so Col. 11, 1, 5; Liv. 44, 33, 6.
    b.
    With names of towns to denote origin, extraction, instead of gentile adjectives. From, of:

    pastores a Pergamide,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 1:

    Turnus ab Aricia,

    Liv. 1, 50, 3 (for which Aricinus, id. 1, 51, 1):

    obsides dant trecentos principum a Cora atque Pometia liberos,

    Liv. 2, 22, 2; and poet.: O longa mundi servator ab Alba, Auguste, thou who art descended from the old Alban race of kings (=oriundus, or ortus regibus Albanis), Prop. 5, 6, 37.
    c.
    In giving the etymology of a name: eam rem (sc. legem, Gr. nomon) illi Graeco putant nomine a suum cuique tribuendo appellatam, ego nostro a legendo, Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 19: annum intervallum regni fuit: id ab re... interregnum appellatum, Liv. 1, 17, 6:

    (sinus maris) ab nomine propinquae urbis Ambracius appellatus,

    id. 38, 4, 3; and so Varro in his Ling. Lat., and Pliny, in Books 1-5 of H. N., on almost every page. (Cf. also the arts. ex and de.)
    d.
    With verbs of beginning and repeating: a summo bibere, in Plaut. to drink in succession from the one at the head of the table:

    da, puere, ab summo,

    Plaut. As. 5, 2, 41; so,

    da ab Delphio cantharum circum, id Most. 1, 4, 33: ab eo nobis causa ordienda est potissimum,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 7, 21:

    coepere a fame mala,

    Liv. 4, 12, 7:

    cornicem a cauda de ovo exire,

    tail-foremost, Plin. 10, 16, 18:

    a capite repetis, quod quaerimus,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 18 al.
    e.
    With verbs of freeing from, defending, or protecting against any thing:

    a foliis et stercore purgato,

    Cato, R. R. 65 (66), 1:

    tantumne ab re tuast oti tibi?

    Ter. Heaut. 1, [p. 4] 1, 23; cf.:

    Saguntini ut a proeliis quietem habuerant,

    Liv. 21, 11, 5:

    expiandum forum ab illis nefarii sceleris vestigiis,

    Cic. Rab. Perd. 4, 11:

    haec provincia non modo a calamitate, sed etiam a metu calamitatis est defendenda,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 6, 14 (v. defendo):

    ab incendio urbem vigiliis munitam intellegebat,

    Sall. C. 32:

    ut neque sustinere se a lapsu possent,

    Liv. 21, 35, 12:

    ut meam domum metueret atque a me ipso caveret,

    Cic. Sest. 64, 133.
    f.
    With verbs of expecting, fearing, hoping, and the like, ab =a parte, as, Cic. Att. 9, 7, 4: cum eadem metuam ab hac parte, since I fear the same from this side; hence, timere, metuere ab aliquo, not, to be afraid of any one, but, to fear something (proceeding from) from him:

    el metul a Chryside,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 79; cf.:

    ab Hannibale metuens,

    Liv. 23, 36; and:

    metus a praetore,

    id. 23, 15, 7;

    v. Weissenb. ad h. l.: a quo quidem genere, judices, ego numquam timui,

    Cic. Sull. 20, 59:

    postquam nec ab Romanis robis ulla est spes,

    you can expect nothing from the Romans, Liv. 21, 13, 4.
    g.
    With verbs of fastening and holding:

    funiculus a puppi religatus,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 51, 154:

    cum sinistra capillum ejus a vertice teneret,

    Q. Cic. Pet. Cons. 3.
    h.
    Ulcisci se ab aliquo, to take vengeance on one:

    a ferro sanguis humanus se ulciscitur,

    Plin. 34, 14, 41 fin.
    i.
    Cognoscere ab aliqua re to knoio or learn by means of something (different from ab aliquo, to learn from some one):

    id se a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cognovisse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 22.
    j.
    Dolere, laborare, valere ab, instead of the simple abl.:

    doleo ab animo, doleo ab oculis, doleo ab aegritudine,

    Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 62:

    a morbo valui, ab animo aeger fui,

    id. Ep. 1, 2, 26; cf. id. Aul. 2, 2, 9:

    a frigore et aestu ne quid laborent,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 17; so,

    a frigore laborantibus,

    Plin. 32, 10, 46, § 133; cf.:

    laborare ab re frumentaria,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 10, 1; id. B. C. 3, 9; v. laboro.
    k.
    Where verbs and adjectives are joined with ab, instead of the simple abl., ab defines more exactly the respect in which that which is expressed by the verb or adj. is to be understood, in relation to, with regard to, in respect to, on the part of:

    ab ingenio improbus,

    Plaut. Truc. 4, 3, 59:

    a me pudica'st,

    id. Curc. 1, 1, 51:

    orba ab optimatibus contio,

    Cic. Fl. 23, 54; ro Ov. H. 6,156: securos vos ab hac parte reddemus, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 24 fin. (v. securus):

    locus copiosus a frumento,

    Cic. Att. 5, 18, 2; cf.:

    sumus imparati cum a militibas tum a pecunia,

    id. ib. 7, 15 fin.:

    ille Graecus ab omni laude felicior,

    id. Brut. 16, 63:

    ab una parte haud satis prosperuin,

    Liv. 1, 32, 2 al.;

    so often in poets ab arte=arte,

    artfully, Tib. 1, 5, 4; 1, 9, 66; Ov. Am. 2, 4, 30.
    l.
    In the statement of the motive instead of ex, propter, or the simple abl. causae, from, out of, on account of, in consequence of: ab singulari amore scribo, Balb. ap. Cic. Att. 9, 7, B fin.:

    linguam ab irrisu exserentem,

    thrusting out the tongue in derision, Liv. 7, 10, 5:

    ab honore,

    id. 1, 8; so, ab ira, a spe, ab odio, v. Drak. ad Liv. 24, 30, 1: 26, 1, 3; cf. also Kritz and Fabri ad Sall. J. 31, 3, and Fabri ad Liv. 21, 36, 7.
    m.
    Especially in the poets instead of the gen.:

    ab illo injuria,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 129:

    fulgor ab auro,

    Lucr. 2, 5:

    dulces a fontibus undae,

    Verg. G. 2, 243.
    n.
    In indicating a part of the whole, for the more usual ex, of, out of:

    scuto ab novissimis uni militi detracto,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 25, 1:

    nonnuill ab novissimis,

    id. ib.; Cic. Sest. 65, 137; cf. id. ib. 59 fin.: a quibus (captivis) ad Senatum missus (Regulus).
    o.
    In marking that from which any thing proceeds, and to which it belongs:

    qui sunt ab ea disciplina,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 3, 7:

    ab eo qui sunt,

    id. Fin. 4, 3, 7:

    nostri illi a Platone et Aristotele aiunt,

    id. Mur. 30, 63 (in imitation of oi upo tinos).
    p.
    To designate an office or dignity (with or without servus; so not freq. till after the Aug. period;

    in Cic. only once): Pollex, servus a pedibus meus,

    one of my couriers, Cic. Att. 8, 5, 1; so,

    a manu servus,

    a secretary, Suet. Caes. 74: Narcissum ab eplstulis ( secretary) et Pallantem a rationibus ( accountant), id. Claud. 28; and so, ab actis, ab admissione, ab aegris, ab apotheca, ab argento, a balneis, a bibliotheca, a codicillis, a jumentis, a potione, etc. (v. these words and Inscr. Orell. vol. 3, Ind. xi. p. 181 sq.).
    q.
    The use of ab before adverbs is for the most part peculiar to later Latinity:

    a peregre,

    Vitr. 5, 7 (6), 8:

    a foris,

    Plin. 17, 24, 37; Vulg. Gen, 7, 16; ib. Matt. 23, 27:

    ab intus,

    ib. ib. 7, 15:

    ab invicem,

    App. Herb. 112; Vulg. Matt. 25, 32; Cypr. Ep. 63, 9: Hier. Ep. 18:

    a longe,

    Hyg. Fab. 257; Vulg. Gen. 22, 4; ib. Matt. 26, 58:

    a modo,

    ib. ib. 23, 39;

    Hier. Vit. Hilar.: a nune,

    Vulg. Luc. 1, 48:

    a sursum,

    ib. Marc. 15, 38.
    ► a.
    Ab is not repeated like most other prepositions (v. ad, ex, in, etc.) with pron. interrog. or relat. after subst. and pron. demonstr. with ab:

    Arsinoen, Stratum, Naupactum...fateris ab hostibus esse captas. Quibus autem hostibus? Nempe iis, quos, etc.,

    Cic. Pis. 37, 91:

    a rebus gerendis senectus abstrahit. Quibus? An iis, quae in juventute geruntur et viribus?

    id. Sen. 6:

    a Jove incipiendum putat. Quo Jove?

    id. Rep. 1, 36, 56:

    res publica, quascumque vires habebit, ab iis ipsis, quibus tenetur, de te propediem impetrabit,

    id. Fam. 4, 13, 5.—
    b.
    Ab in Plantus is once put after the word which it governs: quo ab, As. 1, 1, 106.—
    c.
    It is in various ways separated from the word which it governs:

    a vitae periculo,

    Cic. Brut. 91, 313:

    a nullius umquam me tempore aut commodo,

    id. Arch. 6, 12:

    a minus bono,

    Sall. C. 2, 6:

    a satis miti principio,

    Liv. 1, 6, 4:

    damnis dives ab ipsa suis,

    Ov. H. 9, 96; so id. ib. 12, 18; 13, 116.—
    d.
    The poets join a and que, making aque; but in good prose que is annexed to the following abl. (a meque, abs teque, etc.):

    aque Chao,

    Verg. G. 4, 347:

    aque mero,

    Ov. M. 3, 631:

    aque viro,

    id. H. 6, 156:

    aque suis,

    id. Tr. 5, 2, 74 al. But:

    a meque,

    Cic. Fam. 2, 16, 1:

    abs teque,

    id. Att. 3, 15, 4:

    a teque,

    id. ib. 8, 11, §

    7: a primaque adulescentia,

    id. Brut. 91, 315 al. —
    e.
    A Greek noun joined with ab stands in the dat.: a parte negotiati, hoc est pragmatikê, removisse, Quint. 3, 7, 1.
    III.
    In composition ab,
    1.
    Retains its original signif.: abducere, to take or carry away from some place: abstrahere, to draw auay; also, downward: abicere, to throw down; and denoting a departure from the idea of the simple word, it has an effect apparently privative: absimilis, departing from the similar, unlike: abnormis, departing from the rule, unusual (different from dissimilis, enormis); and so also in amens=a mente remotus, alienus ( out of one's senses, without self-control, insane): absurdus, missounding, then incongruous, irrational: abutor (in one of its senses), to misuse: aborior, abortus, to miscarry: abludo; for the privative force the Latin regularly employs in-, v. 2. in.—
    2.
    It more rarely designates completeness, as in absorbere, abutor ( to use up). (The designation of the fourth generation in the ascending or descending line by ab belongs here only in appearance; as abavus for quartus pater, great-great-grandfather, although the Greeks introduced upopappos; for the immutability of the syllable ab in abpatrnus and abmatertera, as well as the signif. Of the word abavus, grandfather's grandfather, imitated in abnepos, grandchild's grandchild, seems to point to a derivation from avi avus, as Festus, p. 13 Mull., explains atavus, by atta avi, or, rather, attae avus.)

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > ab

  • 17 corregir

    v.
    1 to correct.
    corrígeme si me equivoco, pero creo que… correct me if I'm wrong, but I think…
    Ella corrigió su error She corrected her error.
    María corrigió a los chicos Mary corrected=reprimanded the kids.
    María corrigió el planteamiento Mary corrected=revised the approach.
    2 to reprimand.
    * * *
    Conjugation model [ ELEGIR], like link=elegir elegir
    1 (amendar) to correct, rectify
    2 (reprender) to reprimand, scold, tell off
    3 EDUCACIÓN to mark
    4 (en impresión) to read, proofread
    1 (persona) to mend one's ways
    2 (defecto) to right itself
    * * *
    verb
    * * *
    1. VT
    1) (=rectificar) [+ error, defecto, rumbo, pruebas de imprenta] to correct; [+ vicio] to get rid of; [+ comportamiento] to improve; [+ tendencia] to correct, counteract; (Econ) [+ déficit] to counteract

    ¡deja ya de corregirme! — stop correcting me!

    corrígeme si me equivoco, pero creo que aquí hemos estado ya — correct me if I'm wrong, but I think we've been here before

    2) (Educ) [+ examen, dictado, tareas] to mark, grade (EEUU)
    2.
    See:
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    a) <error/falta> to correct; < modales> to improve, mend
    b) <examen/dictado> to correct, grade (AmE), to mark (BrE)
    c) <galeradas/pruebas> to correct
    d) <defecto físico/postura> to correct
    e) < trayectoria> to correct
    2.
    corregirse v pron
    1)
    b) (refl) ( al hablar) to correct oneself

    corregirse de algo: se corrigió del error — she corrected her mistake

    * * *
    = correct, make + good, put + Nombre + right, repair, amend, set + right, redress, put + right, right, edit.
    Ex. Packages which have been used will be thoroughly tested in various applications, and any weakness corrected.
    Ex. Any child who comes to school at five years old without certain kinds of literary experience is a deprived child in whose growth there are deficiencies already difficult to make good.
    Ex. In 1986/87 Glasgow District Library spent over £30,000 on vandalism -- both on putting it right and in trying to prevent it.
    Ex. In the more common perspective of linear causality, we seek to explain a negative consequence by searching for its root cause and repairing it.
    Ex. This article shows how to amend and cancel orders and how to arrange delivery by telefacsimile.
    Ex. A serious omission or duplication in a page of prose, for instance, might necessitate the rejustification of dozens of lines, whereas if the mistake had been spotted in the stick it could have been set right in a matter of moments.
    Ex. To redress this iniquity women are demanding not only equal pay for equal work, but equal pay for work of equal value.
    Ex. The author emphasises the importance of the early stages of planning, where the seeds of failure are often sown, and mistakes made then will be very difficult to put right later.
    Ex. The author questions whether this is a transitional phenomenon which will be righted later.
    Ex. During the construction of a thesaurus, the computer can be enlisted to sort, merge, edit and compare terms.
    ----
    * corregir a mano = hand-correct.
    * corregir deficiencias = correct + deficiencies.
    * corregir errores = debug.
    * corregir exámenes = mark + exams.
    * corregir inexactitudes = set + the record straight.
    * corregirlo = put + matters + right.
    * corregir pruebas = proof, proofread.
    * corregirse = clean up + Posesivo + act.
    * corregir una prueba = correct + proof.
    * corregir una situación = correct + situation, redress + situation.
    * corregir un error = correct + error, amend + mistake, correct + a wrong, correct + Posesivo + mistake.
    * corregir un mal = correct + a wrong.
    * corregir un problema = correct + problem.
    * sin corregir = unamended, uncorrected, unrevised.
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    a) <error/falta> to correct; < modales> to improve, mend
    b) <examen/dictado> to correct, grade (AmE), to mark (BrE)
    c) <galeradas/pruebas> to correct
    d) <defecto físico/postura> to correct
    e) < trayectoria> to correct
    2.
    corregirse v pron
    1)
    b) (refl) ( al hablar) to correct oneself

    corregirse de algo: se corrigió del error — she corrected her mistake

    * * *
    = correct, make + good, put + Nombre + right, repair, amend, set + right, redress, put + right, right, edit.

    Ex: Packages which have been used will be thoroughly tested in various applications, and any weakness corrected.

    Ex: Any child who comes to school at five years old without certain kinds of literary experience is a deprived child in whose growth there are deficiencies already difficult to make good.
    Ex: In 1986/87 Glasgow District Library spent over £30,000 on vandalism -- both on putting it right and in trying to prevent it.
    Ex: In the more common perspective of linear causality, we seek to explain a negative consequence by searching for its root cause and repairing it.
    Ex: This article shows how to amend and cancel orders and how to arrange delivery by telefacsimile.
    Ex: A serious omission or duplication in a page of prose, for instance, might necessitate the rejustification of dozens of lines, whereas if the mistake had been spotted in the stick it could have been set right in a matter of moments.
    Ex: To redress this iniquity women are demanding not only equal pay for equal work, but equal pay for work of equal value.
    Ex: The author emphasises the importance of the early stages of planning, where the seeds of failure are often sown, and mistakes made then will be very difficult to put right later.
    Ex: The author questions whether this is a transitional phenomenon which will be righted later.
    Ex: During the construction of a thesaurus, the computer can be enlisted to sort, merge, edit and compare terms.
    * corregir a mano = hand-correct.
    * corregir deficiencias = correct + deficiencies.
    * corregir errores = debug.
    * corregir exámenes = mark + exams.
    * corregir inexactitudes = set + the record straight.
    * corregirlo = put + matters + right.
    * corregir pruebas = proof, proofread.
    * corregirse = clean up + Posesivo + act.
    * corregir una prueba = correct + proof.
    * corregir una situación = correct + situation, redress + situation.
    * corregir un error = correct + error, amend + mistake, correct + a wrong, correct + Posesivo + mistake.
    * corregir un mal = correct + a wrong.
    * corregir un problema = correct + problem.
    * sin corregir = unamended, uncorrected, unrevised.

    * * *
    corregir [I8 ]
    vt
    1 ‹error/falta› to correct
    quiere que lo corrijan cuando se equivoca he wants to be corrected when he makes a mistake
    tendrás que corregir esos modales you'll have to improve o mend your manners
    2 ‹examen/dictado› to correct, grade ( AmE), to mark ( BrE)
    3 ‹galeradas/pruebas› to correct, read
    4 ‹defecto físico/postura› to correct
    5 ‹rumbo/trayectoria› to correct
    A
    1 (en el comportamiento) to change o mend one's ways
    hace esfuerzos para corregirse de ese hábito he is trying to get out of that habit
    2 ( refl) (al hablar) to correct oneself corregirse DE algo:
    se corrigió del error she corrected her mistake
    B
    «defecto físico»: un defecto que se corrige solo a defect which corrects itself
    * * *

     

    corregir ( conjugate corregir) verbo transitivo ( en general) to correct;
    ‹ modales› to improve, mend;
    ‹examen/prueba› to correct;
    ( puntuar) to grade (AmE), to mark (BrE)
    corregirse verbo pronominal
    a) ( en el comportamiento) to change o mend one's ways



    corregir verbo transitivo to correct
    ' corregir' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    enderezar
    - enmendar
    - prueba
    - plantilla
    English:
    amend
    - chasten
    - copy-edit
    - correct
    - edit
    - imbalance
    - mark
    - proof
    - proofread
    - right
    - grade
    - pick
    - redress
    * * *
    ♦ vt
    1. [error] to correct;
    corrígeme si me equivoco, pero creo que… correct me if I'm wrong, but I think…;
    estas gafas corregirán la visión these glasses will correct your vision
    2. [pruebas, galeradas] to proofread
    3. [examen] to mark
    4. [rumbo] to correct
    5. [reprender] to reprimand
    * * *
    v/t correct
    * * *
    corregir {28} vt
    1) enmendar: to correct, to emend
    2) : to reprimand
    3)
    corregir pruebas : to proofread
    * * *
    corregir vb to correct

    Spanish-English dictionary > corregir

  • 18 ὅς

    ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
    ① as relative pron. who, which, what, that (Hom.+). On its use s. B-D-F §293–97; 377–80; Rydbeck 98–118; W-S. §24; Rob. 711–26, and for ancient Gk. in gener. Kühner-G. II 399ff; Schwyzer II 639–41.
    ⓐ As a general rule, the relative pron. agrees in gender and number w. the noun or pron. to which it refers (i.e. its antecedent); its case is determined by the verb, noun, or prep. that governs it: ὁ ἀστήρ, ὸ̔ν εἶδον Mt 2:9. ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ὅν ἐγὼ καταγγέλλω ὑμῖν Ac 17:3. Ἰουδαῖον, ᾧ (sc. ἦν) ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς 13:6. ὁ Ἰουδαῖος …, οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος Ro 2:29. Ἰσραηλίτης, ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν J 1:47. οὗτος, περὶ οὗ ἀκούω τοιαῦτα Lk 9:9 and very oft.
    ⓑ A demonstrative pron. is freq. concealed within the relative pron.:
    α. in such a way that both pronouns stand in the same case: ὅς the one who ὅς οὐ λαμβάνει Mt 10:38; sim. Mk 4:9; 9:40 (the three w. implied condition). οὗ of the one whose J 18:26. ᾧ to the one to whom Ro 6:16. ὅν the one whom (or someth. sim.) Mk 15:12; J 1:45. οἷς to those for whom Mt 20:23. οὕς those whom Mk 3:13; J 5:21. ὅ that which, what Mt 10:27.—A prep. governing the relative belongs in certain pass. to the (omitted) demonstr. pron. alone: παρʼ ὅ Ro 12:3; Gal 1:8; ὑπὲρ ὅ (ἅ) 1 Cor 10:13; 2 Cor 12:6; Phlm 21; πρὸς ἅ 2 Cor 5:10; εἰς ὅν J 6:29. In others it must be added to both pronouns: ἐν ᾧ in that in which 2 Cor 11:12; 1 Pt 2:12; 3:16 (these passages in 1 Pt may be classed under 1kγ also). ἐν οἷς Phil 4:11. ὑπὲρ οὑ because of that for which 1 Cor 10:30. ἀφʼ ὧν from the persons from whom 2 Cor 2:3.—The much disputed pass. ἑταῖρε, ἐφʼ ὸ̔ πάρει Mt 26:50 would belong here if we were to supply the words necessary to make it read about as follows: friend, (are you misusing the kiss) for that (purpose) for which you are here? (Wlh.; EKlostermann) or thus: in connection with that (=the purposes), for which (=for the realization of which) you have appeared (do you kiss me)? (Rdm.2 78). Friend, are you here for this purpose? FRehkopf, ZNW 52, ’61, 109–15. But s. βב and iβ below.
    β. But the two pronouns can also stand in different cases; in such instances the demonstr. pron. is nearly always in the nom. or acc.
    א. in the nom. οὗ one whose Ac 13:25. ὧν those whose Ro 4:7 (Ps 31:1). ᾧ the one to or for whom Lk 7:43; 2 Pt 1:9. οἷς those to whom Mt 19:11; Ro 15:21 (Is 52:15). ὅ that (nom.) which (acc.) Mt 13:12; 25:29; 26:13; Mk 11:23; Lk 12:3. Likew. ἅ Lk 12:20. ὅν he whom J 3:34; 4:18; Ac 10:21. ἐφʼ ὅν the one about whom Hb 7:13.
    ב. in the acc. ὧν the things of which J 13:29. ᾧ the one (in) whom 2 Ti 1:12. So also w. a prep.: ἐν ᾧ anything by which Ro 14:21. ἐν οἷς things in which 2 Pt 2:12. ἐφʼ ὅ that upon which Lk 5:25. περὶ ὧν the things of which Ac 24:13. ἐφʼ οἷς from the things of which Ro 6:21 (this passage perh. uses a commercial metaphor, for pap s. Mayser II/2, 434f §121). εἰς ὸ̔ν the one in whom Ro 10:14a.—So Mt 26:50 (s. bα above), if the words to be supplied are about as follows: friend, (do that) for which you have come! (so ESchwartz, ByzZ 25, 1925, 154f; EOwen, JTS 29, 1928, 384–86; WSpiegelberg, ZNW 28, 1929, 341–43; FZorell, VD 9, 1929, 112–16; sim. PMaas, Byz.-Neugriech. Jahrb. 8, ’31, 99; 9, ’32, 64; WEltester: OCullmann Festschr., ’62, 70–91; but s. iβ end.—S. Jos., Bell. 2, 615 at πάρειμι 1a).
    ג. Only in isolated instances does the demonstr. pron. to be supplied stand in another case: οὗ = τούτῳ, οὗ in him of whom Ro 10:14b. παρʼ ὧν = τούτοις, παρʼ ὧν Lk 6:34.
    ⓒ Constructions peculiar in some respect
    α. The pleonastic use of the pers. pron. after ὅς (Mlt. 94f; B-D-F §297) γυνὴ ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς Mk 7:25 is found in older Gk. (Hyperid., Euxen. 3 ὧν … τούτων.—Kühner-G. II 433f), and is not unknown in later Gk. (POxy 117, 15), but above all is suggested by Semitic languages (LXX; GrBar 2:1; Thackeray 46; JHudson, ET 53, ’41/42, 266f); the omission of αὐτῆς in the v.l. is in line w. Gk. usage. οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ Mt 3:12; Lk 3:17. οὗ … τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ Mk 1:7; Lk 3:16. οὗ τῷ μώλωπι αὐτοῦ 1 Pt 2:24 v.l. οὗ καὶ πολλὰ αὐτοῦ συγγράματα EpilMosq 2. In a quot. ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται … ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 = Am 9:12. οὗ ἡ πνοὴ αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 21:9. Esp. freq. in Rv 3:8; 7:2, 9; 9:11 v.l.; 13:8, 12; 20:8.
    β. constructions ‘ad sensum’
    א. a relative in the sing. refers to someth. in the pl. οὐρανοῖς … ἐξ οὗ (οὐρανοῦ) Phil 3:20.
    ב. a relative in the pl. refers to a sing. (Jdth 4:8 γερουσία, οἵ) πλῆθος πολύ …, οἳ ἦλθον Lk 6:17f. κατὰ πόλιν πᾶσαν, ἐν αἷς Ac 15:36. Cp. ἤδη δευτέραν ἐπιστολήν, ἐν αἷς (i.e. ἐν ταῖς δυσὶν ἐπιστ.) 2 Pt 3:1.
    ג. the relative conforms to the natural gender rather than the grammatical gender of its antecedent noun τέκνα μου, οὕς Gal 4:19; cp. 2 J 1; Phlm 10. ἔθνη, οἵ Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); cp. 26:17. παιδάριον, ὅς J 6:9. θηρίον, ὅς Rv 13:14. ὀνόματα, οἵ 3:4 v.l. γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς, ἐν οἷς Phil 2:15. W. ref. to Christ, τὴν κεφαλήν, ἐξ οὗ Col 2:19.
    ⓓ Attraction (or assimilation) of the relative. Just as in Hdt. and freq. Att., ins, pap, LXX, the simple relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ is somet. attracted to the case of its antecedent, even though the relationship of the relative within its own clause would demand a different case.
    α. In most instances it is the acc. of the rel. that is attracted to the gen. or dat. of the antecedent: περὶ πράγματος οὗ ἐὰν αἰτήσωνται Mt 18:19. τῆς διαθήκης ἧς ὁ θεὸς διέθετο Ac 3:25. Cp. Mt 24:50b; Mk 7:13; Lk 2:20; 3:19; 5:9; 9:43; 15:16; J 4:14; 7:31; 15:20; 17:5; 21:10; Ac 1:1; 2:22; 22:10; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 1:6; 10:8, 13; Eph 2:10; 2 Th 1:4; Jd 15 al.—When the antecedent is an understood but unexpressed demonstr. pron. (s. b, beg.) that would stand in the gen. or dat., the acc. of a relative pron. can be attracted to this gen. or dat.: οὐδὲν ὧν ἑώρακαν is really οὐδὲν τούτων ἃ ἑώρακαν Lk 9:36 (Schwyzer II 641); ἅ takes on the case of τούτων which, in turn, is omitted (so already Soph., Pla., et al.).—23:14, 41; Ac 8:24; 21:19, 24; 22:15; 25:11; 26:16; Ro 15:18; 1 Cor 7:1; Eph 3:20; Hb 5:8. ὧν = τούτων, οὕς J 17:9; 2 Cor 12:17. οἷς = τούτοις, ἅ Lk 24:25.
    β. The dat. of the relative is less frequently attracted (B-D-F §294, 2; Rob. 717) ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς (=ᾗ) ἀνελήμφθη Ac 1:22 (cp. Lev 23:15; 25:50; Bar 1:19); Eph 1:6; 4:1; 1 Ti 4:6 v.l.; κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν θεοῦ = κατέν. τοῦ θεοῦ ᾧ ἐπίστ. Ro 4:17. διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς παρακαλούμεθα 2 Cor 1:4.
    γ. In relative clauses that consist of subject, predicate, and copula, the relative pron. somet. agrees in gender and number not w. the noun to which it refers, but w. the predicate if it is the subj. and, conversely, w. the subj. if it is the pred. of its own clause: πνεύματι …, ὅς ἐστιν ἀρραβών Eph 1:14 v.l. τῷ σπέρματί σου, ὅς ἐστιν Χριστός Gal 3:16. τὴν μάχαιραν τοῦ πνεύματος, ὅ ἐστιν ῥῆμα θεοῦ Eph 6:17.—Rv 4:5; 5:8.
    δ. Inverse attraction occurs when the relative pronoun attracts its antecedent to its own case (as early as Hom.; also Soph., Oed. Rex 449; s. Kühner-G. II 413; Schwyzer II 641; B-D-F §295; Rob. 717f); τὸν ἄρτον ὸ̔ν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία … ἐστιν; = ὁ ἄρτος ὅν … 1 Cor 10:16. λίθον, ὸ̔ν ἀπεδοκίμασαν … οὗτος ἐγενήθη (Ps 117:22) Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; 1 Pt 2:7 v.l.—παντὶ ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ Lk 12:48. ὅρκον, ὸ̔ν ὤμοσεν (=μνησθῆναι ὅρκου ὅν) 1:73 (s. W-S. §24, 7 note). τοὺς λίθους, οὓς εἶδες, ἀποβεβλημένους, οὗτοι … ἐφόρεσαν Hs 9, 13, 3. Cp. 1J 2:25.
    ε. Attraction can, as in earlier Gk. (Thu. 2, 70, 4), fail to take place when the relative clause is more distinctly separated fr. its antecedent by additional modifiers of the noun and by the importance attaching to the content of the relative clause itself (B-D-F §294, 1; Rob. 714f): τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς, ἣν ἔπηξεν ὁ κύριος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπος Hb 8:2. But s. also Mk 13:19; J 2:22; 4:5; Ac 8:32; 1 Ti 4:3; Tit 1:2; Phlm 10; Hb 9:7; Rv 1:20.
    ⓔ The noun which is the antecedent of a relative clause can be incorporated into the latter
    α. without abbreviating the constr. and without attraction of the case: ᾗ οὐ δοκεῖτε ὥρᾳ = τῇ ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ δοκ. Mt 24:44; cp. Lk 12:40; 17:29, 30. ἃ ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώματα 24:1. ὸ̔ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον J 6:14. ὸ̔ θέλω ἀγαθόν Ro 7:19.
    β. w. abbreviation, in that a prep. normally used twice is used only once: ἐν ᾧ κρίματι κρίνετε κριθήσεσθε = ἐν τῷ κρίματι, ἐν ᾧ κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε Mt 7:2a. Cp. vs. 2b; Mk 4:24. ἐν ᾧ ἦν τόπῳ = ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ἐν ᾧ ἦν J 11:6. καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον = κατὰ τὸν τρόπον, καθʼ ὅν Ac 15:11.
    γ. w. a change in case, due mostly to attraction
    א. of the relative pron. περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐποίησεν πονηρῶν = περὶ πάντων πονηρῶν, ἃ ἐπ. Lk 3:19. περὶ πασῶν ὧν εἶδον δυνάμεων = περὶ πασῶν δυνάμεων, ἃς εἶδον 19:37. αἰτίαν … ὧν ἐγὼ ὑπενόουν πονηρῶν Ac 25:18.—The dat. of the relative is also attracted to other cases: ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας = ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας, ᾖ Mt 24:38; Lk 1:20; 17:27; Ac 1:2. ἀφʼ ἧς ἡμέρας Col 1:6, 9.
    ב. of the noun to which the rel. refers: ὸ̔ν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα Ἰωάννην, οὗτος ἠγέρθη = Ἰωάννης ὸ̔ν κτλ. Mk 6:16 εἰς ὸ̔ν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς = τῷ τύπῳ τῆς διδαχῆς εἰς ὸ̔ν παρεδόθητε Ro 6:17.
    δ. The analysis is doubtful in passages like περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης λόγων = περὶ τῶν λόγων οὓς κατηχήθης or τῶν λόγων, περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης Lk 1:4. ἄγοντες παρʼ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνι Ac 21:16 must acc. to the sense = ἄγοντες πρὸς Μνάσωνα, ἵνα ξενισθῶμεν παρʼ αὐτῷ. S. B-D-F §294, 5; Rob. 719.
    ⓕ The prep. can be omitted before the relative pron. if it has already been used before the antecedent noun: ἐν παντὶ χρόνῳ ᾧ (=ἐν ὧ.) Ac 1:21. εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὅ (=εἰς ὅ) 13:2. ἀπὸ πάντων ὧν (=ἀφʼ ὧν) vs. 38. Cp. 26:2. ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ ᾧ (=ἐν ᾧ) Rv 18:6.
    ⓖ The neut. is used
    α. in explanations, esp. of foreign words and of allegories: ὅ ἐστιν which or that is, which means: βασιλεὺς Σαλήμ, ὅ ἐστιν βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης Hb 7:2; cp. Mt 27:33; Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; 15:42. Also ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον Mt 1:23; Mk 5:41; Ac 4:36; cp. J 1:38, 41f. ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενος κρανίου τόπος Mk 15:22 v.l. (for μεθερμηνευόμενον). τόπος, ὸ̔ λέγεται, Ἑβραϊστὶ Γολγοθά J 19:17.—S. also αὐλῆς, ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον Mk 15:16. λεπτὰ δὺο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 12:42. τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἡ ἐκκλησία Col 1:24. πλεονέκτης ὅ ἐστιν εἰδωλολάτρης Eph 5:5. τὴν ἀγάπην ὅ ἐστιν σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος Col 3:14.—B-D-F §132, 2.
    β. when the relative pron. looks back upon a whole clause: τοῦτον τ. Ἰησοῦν ἀνέστησεν ὁ θεός, οὗ πάντες ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν μάρτυρες Ac 2:32; cp. 3:15; 11:30; 26:9f; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29; 1 Pt 2:8; Rv 21:8.
    γ. ὅ is to be understood as an obj. acc. and gains its content fr. what immediately follows in these places (s. W-S. §24, 9; Rob. 715): ὸ̔ ἀπέθανεν, τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν ἐφάπαξ = τὸν θάνατον, ὸ̔ν ἀπέθανεν κτλ. what he died, i.e. the death he suffered, he suffered for sin Ro 6:10a; cp. vs. 10b. ὸ̔ νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί the life that I now live in the flesh Gal 2:20.
    ⓗ The relative is used w. consecutive or final mng. (result or purpose): τίς ἔγνω νοῦν κυρίου, ὸ̔ς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν; who has known the mind of the Lord, so that he could instruct him? 1 Cor 2:16 (cp. Is 40:13). ἄξιός ἐστιν ᾧ παρέξῃ τοῦτο he is worthy that you should grant him this Lk 7:4. ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου …, ὸ̔ς κατασκευάσει Mt 11:10. ἔπεμψα Τιμόθεον …, ὸ̔ς ὑμᾶς ἀναμνήσει 1 Cor 4:17. ἔχετε μεθʼ ἑαυτῶν, εἰς οὓς ἐργάσεσθε τὸ καλόν 21:2.
    ⓘ taking the place of the interrogative pron.
    α. in indirect questions (Soph., Oed. Rex 1068; Thu. 1, 136, 4; Attic ins of 411 B.C. in Meisterhans3-Schw.; pap [Witkowski 30, 7]; oft. Joseph. [Schmidt 369]; Just., D. 44, 4 διʼ ἧς ὁδοῦ). ὸ̔ ἐγὼ ποιῶ what I am doing J 13:7. ἃ λέγουσιν 1 Ti 1:7 (Just., D. 9, 1 οὐ γὰρ οἶδας ὸ̔ λέγεις).—J 18:21.
    β. NT philology has generally dismissed the proposition that ὅς is used in direct questions (Mlt. 93; B-D-F §300, 2; Radermacher2 78; PMaas [see 1bβב above]). An unambiguous example of it is yet to be found. Even the ins on a goblet in Dssm., LO 100ff [LAE 125–31], ET 33, 1922, 491–93 leaves room for doubt. Therefore also the translation of ἐφʼ ὸ̔ πάρει Mt 26:50 as ‘what are you here for?’ (so Goodsp., Probs. 41–43; similarly, as early as Luther, later Dssm.; JWilson, ET 41, 1930, 334) has been held suspect. S. ZNW 52, ’61, 109ff.—Rob. 725 doubts the interrogative here, but Mlt-Turner 50 inclines toward it. If further proof for interrogative use of ὅς can be found, lit.-crit. considerations (s. vv. 14–16) invite attention to the v.l. (s. Tdf. app.) ἐφʼ ᾦ, a combination used in commercial documents (PGrenf II, 17, 2; 5; Mayser II/1 p. 215); the colloquial use suggests the sense: What deal did you make?—See also 1bβב above.
    ⓙ combined w. particles
    α. with ἄν (ἐάν), s. ἄν I. b.
    β. with γέ (s. γέ aβ and cp. PFlor 370, 9) Ro 8:32.
    γ. w. δήποτε whatever J 5:3(4) v.l. (the vv.ll. vary betw. οἵῳ and ᾧ, δηποτοῦν and δήποτε).
    δ. w. καί who also Mk 3:19; Lk 6:13f; 7:49 al.
    ε. with περ = ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ (TestSol, TestAbr; TestJob 7:13; JosAs 14:12; GrBar; ApcSed 2:1; Jos., Ant. 2, 277, Vi. 95; apolog. [exc. Mel.]) just the one who Mk 15:6 v.l. ὅπερ which indeed Ox 840, 35; ISm 4:1. πάντα ἅπερ whatever GPt 11:45.
    ⓚ used w. preposition (s. also above: 1bα; 1bβב; 1eβ,γ; 1f, and s. Johannessohn, Präp. 382f [ind.]), whereby a kind of conjunction is formed:
    α. with ἀντί: ἀνθʼ ὧν (s. ἀντί 4) because Lk 1:20; 19:44; Ac 12:23; 2 Th 2:10; therefore Lk 12:3.
    β. w. εἰς: εἰς ὅ to this end 2 Th 1:11.
    γ. with ἐν: ἐν οἷς connects w. the situation described in what precedes under which circumstances = under these circumstances Lk 12:1; Ac 24:18 v.l.; 26:12. So also perh. ἐν ᾧ 1 Pt 1:6; 2:12; 3:16, 19; 4:4. S. also ἐν 7 and cp. 1bα above.
    δ. w. ἐπί: ἐφʼ ᾧ (normally, ‘for which’: Plut., Cimon 483 [8, 6] Cimon receives honors in requital for his generous deed [cp. the pl. ἐφʼ οἷς IPriene 114, 22 of honors heaped on a gymnasiarch for his numerous contributions]; cp. Plut., Mor. 522e and Diog. L. 7, 173. Conversely Plut., Aratus 1048 [44, 4]: A. suffers some dishonor ‘for what’ he did to one of his associates) has freq. been interpreted=ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that, because Ro 5:12 (lit. on ἁμαρτία 3a); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for 4:10. But a commercial metaphor may find expression in the first 3 passages cited here; s. ἐπί 6c. Difft. on Ro 5:12 JFitzmyer, NTS 39, ’93, 321–39; also comm. (Anchor), ad loc.: ‘with the result that, so that’
    ε. οὗ χάριν therefore Lk 7:47.
    ζ. in indications of time: ἀφʼ ἧς (s. ἀπό 2bγ and cp. BGU 252, 9 [98 A.D.]) from the time when; since Lk 7:45; Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4; Hs 8, 6, 6 v.l.; as soon as, after 8, 1, 4.—ἀφʼ οὗ (s. ἀπό 2bγ) when once, since Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18. ἄχρι οὗ (s. ἄχρι 1bα) until (the time when) Ac 7:18; Ro 11:25; 1 Cor 11:26; Gal 3:19. Also ἕως οὗ until Mt 1:25; 13:33; 14:22; 17:9; Lk 13:21; D 11:6 al. μέχρις οὗ until Mk 13:30; Gal 4:19.—On the gen. οὗ as an adv. of place s. it as a separate entry.
    ② Demonstrative pron. this (one) (Hom.+; prose of Hdt. et al. [Kühner-G. II 228f]; pap, LXX).
    ⓐ ὸ̔ς δέ but he (Ps.-Lucian, Philopatris 22; PRyl 144, 14 [38 A.D.]) Mk 15:23; J 5:11 v.l. Mostly
    ⓑ ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δέ the one … the other (Hippocr.+; very oft. in later wr.; POxy 1189, 7 [c. 117 A.D.]; SibOr 3, 654) the masc. in var. cases of sing. and pl. Mt 22:5; Lk 23:33; Ac 27:44; Ro 14:5; 1 Cor 11:21; 2 Cor 2:16; Jd 22f. ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δέ this … that Ro 9:21. ἃ μὲν … ἃ δέ (Lucian, Rhet. Praec. 15) some … others 2 Ti 2:20. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δὲ … ὸ̔ς δέ Mt 21:35; 25:15 (Lucian, Tim. 57 διδοὺς … ᾧ μὲν πέντε δραχμάς, ᾧ δέ μνᾶν, ᾧ δὲ ἡμιτάλαντον). ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δὲ … ὸ̔ δέ Mt 13:8b, 23. ᾧ μὲν … ἄλλῳ δὲ … ἑτέρῳ (ἄλλῳ δέ is then repeated five times, and before the last one there is a second ἑτέρῳ) 1 Cor 12:8–10. ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἄλλο κτλ. Mk 4:4. ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἕτερον (repeated several times) Lk 8:5. ἃ μὲν … ἄλλα δέ (repeated several times) Mt 13:4–8a. In anacoluthon οὓς μέν without οὓς δέ 1 Cor 12:28. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὁ δὲ ἀσθενῶν Ro 14:2.—B-D-F §250. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 100f.—DELG 1 ὅς. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὅς

  • 19 ὅς

    ὅς [(A)], ἥ, ὅ, gen. οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc. ; dat. pl. οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: [dialect] Ep. forms, gen. ὅου (prob. replacing Οο) in the phrases
    A

    ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ' ὀλεῖται Il.2.325

    , h.Ap. 156 ;

    ὅου κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον Od.1.70

     (elsewh.

    οὗ Il. 7.325

    , al., never οἷο); fem.

    ἕης Il.16.208

     (perh. imitation of ὅου; elsewh. only

    ἧς 5.265

    , al.); dat. pl. οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in Hom.):—Pron. used,
    A as demonstr. by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Art. ὁ, ἡ, τό : in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.
    B as a Relat. by the side of the Art. ὅ, ἥ, τό (v. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstr. and Relat. Pron. must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Skt. Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lith. jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she, it).)
    A DEMONSTR. PRON., = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that; also, he, she, it:
    I Homeric usage: this form only occurs in the nom. masc. and neut. ὅς, ὅ, and perh. nom. fem. ἥ and nom. pl. οἵ, the other cases being supplied by ὁ, ἡ, τό ([etym.] ὅ, ἡ, τό); most codd. have ἥ in Il.17.551, Od. 24.255, al., and this (as also οἵ ) can be referred equally to either (on the accent v. ὁ, ἡ, τό): with γάρ or

    καί, ὃς γὰρ δεύτατος ἦλθεν 1.286

     ;

    ἀλλὰ καὶ ὃς δείδοικε Il.21.198

     ;

    ὃ γὰρ γέρας ἐστὶ θανόντων Od.24.190

    , Il.23.9, cf. 12.344 : freq. used emphatically in apodosi, mostly with οὐδέ or μηδέ before it,

    μηδ' ὅν τινα γαστέρι μήτηρ κοῦρον ἐόντα φέροι, μηδ' ὃς φύγοι Il.6.59

    , cf. 7.160, Od.4.653 : after a part., εἰς ἕτερον γάρ τίς τε ἰδών.., ὃς σπεύδει (for ὅστις ἂν ἴδῃ, ὃς σπεύδει) Hes.Op.22.
    II in later Gr. this usage remained in a few forms:
    1 at the beginning of a clause, καὶ ὅς and he, Hdt.7.18, X.Smp.1.15, Pl. Phd. 118, Prt. 310d ; καὶ ἥ and she, καὶ οἵ and they, Hdt.8.56,87, Pl. Smp. 201e, X.An.7.6.4.
    2

    ὃς καὶ ὅς

     such and such a person,

    Hdt.4.68

    :—here also the Art. supplied the obl. cases.
    3 ἦ δ' ὅς, ἦ δ' ἥ, said he, said she, v. ἠμί.
    4 in oppositions, where it sts. answers to the Art.,

    Λέριοι κακοί· οὐχ ὁ μέν, ὃς δ' οὔ.. Phoc.1

     ;

    ὃς μὲν.., ὃ δὲ.. Mosch.3.76

    ;

    ὃ μὲν.., ὃς δὲ.., ὃ δὲ.., ὃς δὲ.. Bion 1.81

     ; so

    τῷ μὲν.., ᾧ δὲ.., ᾧ δὲ.. AP6.187

     (Alph.); ὃ μὲν.., ὃ δὲ.., ὃ δὲ.. (neut.) Ev.Matt.13.8 ;

    ἂ μὲν.., ἃ δὲ.. Heraclit.102

    , Archyt. ap. Stob.3.1.110 ;

    ὧν μὲν.., ὧν δὲ.. Philem.99

     ;

    πόλεις ἃς μὲν.., ἃς δὲ.. D.18.71

     (as v. l.): so in [dialect] Dor. dat. fem. as Adv.,

    ᾇ μὲν.., ᾇ δὲ.. Tab.Heracl.1.81

     ;

    ἐφ' ὧν μὲν.., ἐφ' ὧν δὲ.. Arist.EN 1109a1

     : very freq. in late Prose, Arr.Epict.3.25.1, etc.: also answering to other Prons.,

    ἑτέρων.., ὧν δὲ.. Philem.31.6

     ;

    ἐφ' ᾧ μὲν.., ἐπὶ θατέρῳ δὲ.. Arist. HA 564a21

    , etc.
    B RELAT. PRON., who, which.—By the side of the simple Relat., ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (in Hom. also ὁ, ἡ, τό), we find in common use the compd. forms ὅστε, ὅστις and ὅτις, ὅσπερ and ὅπερ, ὅς γε (q. v.).
    0-0USAGE of the Relat. Pron. (the foll. remarks apply to ὅς γε, ὅσπερ, ὅστε, ὅστις, as well as to ὅς, and to ὁ, ἡ, τό as relat.):
    I in respect of CONCORD.—Prop. it agrees in gender and number with the Noun or Pron. in the antec. clause.—But this rule admits of many exceptions:
    1 the Relat. mayagree with the gender implied, not expressed, in the antec.,

    φίλον θάλος, ὃν τέκον αὐτή Il.22.87

    ;

    τέκνων, οὓς ἤγαγε E.Supp.12

     : so after collective Nouns, the Relat. is freq. put in pl. in the gender implied in the Noun,

    λαόν.., οὕς.. Il.16.369

     ; στρατιάν.. τοιαύτην.., οἵ τινες.., τὸ ναυτικόν, οἵ.., Th.6.91,3.4 ;

    πλήθει, οἵπερ.. Pl.Phdr. 260a

     ; esp. after the names of countries or cities, Τηλέπυλον Λαιστρυγονίην ἀφίκανεν, οἳ.. (i. e. to Telepylos of the Laestrygonians, who..) Od.23.319 ;

    τὰς Ἀθήνας, οἵ γε.. Hdt.7.8

    .

    β' ; Μέγαρα.., οὓς.. Th.6.94

    : it also may agree with the Noun or Pron. implied in an Adj., Θηβαίας ἐπισκοποῦντ' ἀγυιάς, τάν.. the streets of Thebes, which.., S.Ant. 1137 (lyr.); τοὺς Ἡρακλείους παῖδας, ὃς.. the children of Heracles, who.., E.HF 157;

    τῆς ἐμῆς ἐπεισόδου, ὅν..

     of me whom..,

    S.OC 731

    ; τὸν ἥμισύν ἐστ' ἀτελὴς τοῦ χρόνου· εἶθ' ἧς πᾶσι μέτεστι.., where ἧς agrees with ἀτελείας implied in ἀτελής, D.20.8.
    2 when the antec. Noun in sg. implies a class, the Relat. is sts. in pl., ἦ μάλα τις θεὸς ἔνδον, οἳ.. ἔχουσιν (for τις θεῶν, οἵ.. ) Od.19.40 ;

    κῆτος, ἃ μυρία βόσκει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη

     one of the thousands, which..,

    12.97

     ;

    αὐτουργός, οἵπερ..

     one of those who..,

    E.Or. 920

    : rare in Prose,

    ἀνὴρ καλός τε κἀγαθός, ἐν οἷς οὐδαμοῦ σὺ φανήσει γεγονώς D.18.310

    , cf. Lys.1.32.
    3 reversely, the sg. Relat. may follow a pl. antec., where the relat. clause refers to each individual ; but in this case ὅστις or ὃς ἄν is mostly used, ἀνθρώπους τίνυσθον, ὅ τις κ' ἐπίορκον ὀμόσσῃ, for ἀνθρώπων τινά, ὅς κε.., Il.3.279 ; πάντα.., ὅ τι νοοίης, i.e. anything which.., Ar.Nu. 1381 : rarely ὅς alone, τὰ λίνεα [ ὅπλα], τοῦ τάλαντον ὁ πῆχυς εἷλκε a cubit's length where of.., Hdt.7.36.
    4 the Relat. is sts. in the neut., agreeing rather with the notion implied in the antec. than with the Noun itself, διὰ τὴν πλεονεξίαν, ὃ πᾶσα φύσις διώκειν πέφυκεν for profit's sake—a thing which.., Pl.R. 359c, cf. Lg. 849d;

    τοὺς Φωκέας, ὃ σιωπᾶν εἰκὸς ἦν

     a name which..,

    D.19.44

     ; γυναῖκας, ἐφ' ὅπερ.. women, for dealings with whom, E.Ba. 454.
    5 with Verbs of naming, the Relat. freq. agrees with the name added as a predicate, rather than with the antec.,

    ξίφος, τὸν ἀκινάκην καλέουσι Hdt.7.54

    ;

    τὴν ἄκρην, αἳ καλεῦνται Κληΐδες Id.5.108

    , cf. 2.17, 124, etc.
    II in respect of CONSTRUCTION.—Prop., the Relat. is governed by the Noun or Verb in its own clause.—But it is freq. thrown by attraction into the case of the antec. (prob. not in Hom., ἧς in Il.5.265, cf. 23.649, can be expld. otherwise), ἀπὸ παιδεύσιος, τῆς ἐπεπαίδευτο (for τῇ or τήν) Hdt.4.78; freq. in [dialect] Att., Th.7.21, etc.: esp. where a Demonstr. Pron. is unexpressed, while the Relat. takes its case, οὐδὲν ὧν λέγω (for οὐδὲν τούτων ἃ λ.) S.El. 1048, 1220, etc.; ξὺν ᾧπερ εἶχον οἰκετῶν (for ξὺν τούτῳ ὅνπερ) Id.OC 334 ; ἀνθ' ὧν ἂν ἐμοὶ δανείσῃς (for ἀντὶ τούτων ἅ.. ) X.Cyr.3.1.34 ; πρὸς οἷς ἐκτήσαντο (for πρὸς τούτοις ἅ.. ) Pl.Grg. 519a, etc.: the Demonstr. Pron. sts follows,

    ἀφ' ὧν ἐγένεσθε ἀγαθοί, ἀπὸ τούτων ὠφελεῖσθαι Th.3.64

    , cf. D.8.23,26.—This attraction is rare, exc. when the acc. passes into the gen. or dat. (v. supr.): sts. nom. is so attracted, οὐδὲν εἰδότες τῶν ἦν (for τούτων ἃ ἦν) Hdt.1.78; ἀφ' ὧν παρεσκεύασται (for ἀπὸ τούτων ἃ π.) Th.7.67: also dat., ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς (for τούτων οἷς.. ) Pl.Grg. 509a.
    b reversely the antec. passes into the case of the Relat., φυλακὰς δ' ἃς εἴρεαι.., οὔτις (for φυλακῶν.. οὔτις) Il.10.416; τὰς στήλας, τὰς ἵστα, αἱ πλεῦνες.. (for τῶν στηλῶν.. αἱ πλεῦνες) Hdt.2.106: so also when the Noun follows the Relat. clause, it may be put in apposition with the Relat.,

    Κύκλωπος κεχόλωται, ὃν ὀφθαλμοῦ ἀλάωσεν, ἀντίθεον Πολύφημον Od.1.69

    , cf. 4.11, Il.3.123, A.Th. 553, E.Hec. 771, 986, Hipp. 101, etc.
    2 the Demonstr. Pron. or the Noun with an Art. is sts. transferred to the Relat. clause, Ἰνδὸν ποταμόν, ὃς κροκοδείλους δεύτερος οὗτος.. παρέχεται the river Indus, being the second river which.., Hdt.4.44;

    σφραγῖδα.., ἣν ἐπὶ δέλτῳ τήνδε κομίζεις E.IA 156

     (anap.);

    φοβούμεθα δέ γε.. δόξαν.., ὃν δὴ καὶ καλοῦμεν τὸν φόβον ἡμεῖς γε αἰσχύνην Pl.Lg. 647a

    .
    3 the Relat. in all cases may govern a partit. gen., ἀθανάτων ὅς τίς σε.. any one of the immortals who.., Od.15.35, cf. 25,5.448, etc.;

    οἳ.. τῶν ἀστῶν Hdt.7.170

     ;

    οὓς.. βαρβάρων A.Pers. 475

     ;

    ᾧ.. τῶν ἡνιόχων Pl. Phdr. 247b

     : freq. in neut., ἐς ὃ δυνάμιος to what a height of power, Hdt.7.50 ; οἶσθ' οὖν ὃ κάμνει τοῦ λόγου; what part of thy speech, E. Ion 363; ᾧπερ τῆς τέχνης ἐπίστευον in which particular of their art.., Th. 7.36 ; τὰ μακρὰ τείχη, ἃ σφῶν.. εἶχον which portion of their territory, Id.4.109, etc.: rarely in such forms as ἕξουσι δ' ἣν λάβωσιν ἐν ταφῇ χθονός (for ὃ χθονός) A.Th. 819 ( χθόνα cj. Brunck).
    III in respect of the Moods which follow the Relat.:
    1 when the Relat. is equivalent to καί + demonstr. (ὅς = and he..) any mood may follow which may be found in independent clauses: ἦλθε τὸ ναυτικὸν τὸ τῶν βαρβάρων, ὃ τίς οὐκ ἂν ἰδὼν ἐφοβήθη; Lys.2.34 ;

    ὁ δ' εἰς τὸ σῶφρον ἐπ' ἀρετήν τ' ἄγων ἔρως ζηλωτὸς ἀνθρώποισιν· ὧν εἴην ἐγώ E.Fr. 672

     ;

    ἐλπίς, ᾗ μόνῃ σωθεῖμεν ἄν Id.Hel. 815

     ; εἰς καλὸν ἡμῖν Ἄνυτος ὅδε παρεκαθέζετο, ᾧ μεταδῶμεν τῆς σκέψεως to whom let us.., Pl.Men. 89e ; ὃν ὑμεῖς.. νομίσατε which I would have you think.., Lys.19.61: so the inf. in orat. obliq., ἔτι δὲ.. προσετίθει χρήματα οὐκ ὀλίγα, οἷς χρήσεσθαι αὐτούς (sc. ἔφη) Th.2.13: for the inf. after ἐφ' ᾧ τε, v. ἐπί B. 111.3.
    2 after ὅς, ὅστις, = whoever, in collective hypothetical sense (= if A + if B + if C..), the same moods are used as after εἰ:
    a [tense] pres. ind.,

    τῷδ' ἔφες ἀνδρὶ βέλος.. ὅς τις ὅδε κρατέει Il.5.175

     ;

    κλῦθι, ἄναξ, ὅτις ἐσσί Od.5.445

     ; δουληΐην.., ἥτις ἐστί (as we say) whatever it is, Hdt.6.12 ; ὅ τι ἀνὴρ καὶ γυνή ἐστι πλὴν παιδίων all that are man and woman, Id.2.60 ;

    Ζεύς, ὅστις ποτ' ἐστίν A.Ag. 160

     (lyr.): also after

    ὅς, ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὃς πενίῃ εἴκων ἀπατήλια βάζει Od.14.157

    , etc.
    b subj. with ἄν ([etym.] κεν) or, in poetry, without ἄν:

    ξυνίει ἔπος ὅττι κεν εἴπω 19.378

     ;

    οὐ δηναιὸς ὃς ἀθανάτοισι μάχηται Il.5.407

     :—in such cases the opt. is used after secondary tenses,

    Τρῶας ἄμυνε νεῶν, ὅς τις φέροι ἀκάματον πῦρ 15.731

    , cf. Hes.Sc. 480 ;

    πάντας ἑξῆς, ὅτῳ ἐντύχοιεν,.. κτείνοντες Th.7.29

    , cf. Pl.Ap. 21a, etc.
    c sts. opt. without ἄν after a primary tense,

    ὃν πόλις στήσειε, τοῦδε χρὴ κλύειν S.Ant. 666

     ; after an opt.,

    ἔρδοι τις ἣν ἕκαστος εἰδείη τέχνην Ar.V. 1431

    .
    IV peculiar Idioms:
    1 in Homer and correct writers, when two coordinate Relat. clauses were joined by καί or δέ, the Relat. Pron. was freq. replaced in the second clause by the demonstr. even though the case was changed, ἄνδρα.., ὃς μέγα πάντων Ἀργείων κρατέει καί οἱ πείθονται Ἀχαιοί (for καὶ ᾧ) Il.1.78 ; ὅου κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον.. · Θόωσα δέ μιν τέκε νύμφη (for ὃν τέκε) Od.1.70, cf. 14.85, etc. ; and this sts. even without the demonstr. being expressed, δοίη δ' ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι καί οἱ κεχαρισμένος ἔλθοι (for καὶ ὅς οἱ) 2.54, cf. 114 ; οὕς κεν ἐΰ γνοίην καί τ' οὔνομα μυθησαίμην (for καὶ ὧν) Il.3.235 ; ᾗ χαλκὸς μὲν ὑπέστρωται, χαλκὸν δ' ἐπίεσται (nom. supplied) Orac. ap. Hdt.1.47 ;

    ἃς ἐπιστήμας μὲν προσείπομεν.., δέονται δὲ ὀνόματος ἄλλου Pl.R. 533d

    .
    2 the neut. of the Relat. is used in [dialect] Att. to introduce a clause qualifying the whole of the principal clause which follows: the latter clause is commonly introduced by γάρ, ὅτι, εἰ, ἐπειδή, etc.,

    ὃ δὲ δεινότατόν γ' ἐστὶν ἁπάντων, ὁ Ζεὺς γὰρ.. ἕστηκεν κτλ. Ar.Av. 514

    , cf. D.19.211, etc.;

    ὃ δὲ πάντων σχετλιώτατον, εἰ.. βουλευσόμεθα Isoc.6.56

     ;

    ὃ μὲν πάντων θαυμαστότατον ἀκοῦσαι, ὅτι.. Pl. R. 491b

    , cf.Ap. 18c: also without any Conj.,

    ὃ δὲ πάντων δεινότατόν ἐστι, τοιοῦτος ὢν κτλ. And.4.16

    ;

    ὃ δ' ἠπάτα σε πλεῖστον.., ηὔχεις κτλ. E.El. 938

    : c. inf.,

    ὃ δὲ πάντων δεινότατον, τὴν ἀδελφὴν ὑποδέξασθαι Lys.19.33

     (but ὑποδέξασθαι < δεῖ> is prob. cj.), etc.:—so also the neut. pl. ἅ may mean with reference to that which, ἃ δ'.. ἐστί σοι λελεγμένα, πᾶν κέρδος ἡγοῦ.. as to what has been said.., E.Med. 453, cf. Hdt.3.81, S.OT 216, Ar.Eq. 512, etc.
    3 in many instances the Gr. Relat. must be resolved into a Conj. and Pron., θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, ὃς ἡμῖν οὐδὲν δίδως (= ὅτι σὺ) X.Mem.2.7.13, cf. Lys.7.23 codd., Pl.Smp. 204b, etc.: very freq. in conditional clauses, for εἴ or

    ἐάν τις, βέλτερον ὃς... προφύγῃ κακόν, ἠὲ ἁλώῃ Il.14.81

    , cf. Hes.Op. 327 ;

    συμφορὰ δ', ὃς ἂν τύχῃ κακῆς γυναικός E.Fr. 1056

     ;

    τὸ δ' εὐτυχές, οἳ ἂν.. λάχωσι κτλ. Th.2.44

    ;

    τὸ καλῶς ἄρξαι τοῦτ' εἶναι, ὃς ἂν τὴν πατρίδα ὠφελήσῃ Id.6.14

    .
    4 the Relat. freq. stands where we should use a final Conj. or the inf., ἄγγελον ἧκαν, ὃς ἀγγείλειε sent a messenger to tell.., Od. 15.458 ;

    κλητοὺς ὀτρύνομεν, οἵ κε τάχιστα ἔλθωσ'

     that they may..,

    Il. 9.165

     : and freq. with [tense] fut. ind., πρέσβεις ἄγουσα, οἵπερ φράσουσι (v.l. φράσωσι) to tell.., Th.7.25 ;

    πέμψον τιν', ὅστις σημανεῖ E.IT 1209

     (troch.), cf. X.HG2.3.2, Mem.2.1.14: so with [tense] fut. opt.,

    ὀργάνου, ᾧ τὴν τροφὴν δέξοιτο Pl.Ti. 33c

    : also for ὥστε, after οὕτω, ὧδε, etc., οὐκ ἔστιν οὕτω μῶρος, ὃς θανεῖν ἐρᾷ (for ὥστε ἐρᾶν) S.Ant. 220, cf. Hdt.4.52, E.Alc. 198, Ar.Ach. 737, etc.
    5 ὅς is freq. used where we should expect οἷος, as μαθὼν ὃς εἶ φύσιν what thou art, S.Aj. 1259, cf. E.Alc. 640, Pl. Euthd. 283d, etc.
    6 ὅς is sts. = ὅστις or τις in indirect clauses,

    γνώσῃ.. ὅς.. ἡγεμόνων κακὸς ἠδ' ὅς κ' ἐσθλὸς ἔῃσι Il.2.365

     (perh. felt as Relat.); ὃς ἦν ὁ ἀναδέξας, οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν I cannot tell who it was that.., Hdt.6.124 ;

    γενομένης λέσχης ὃς γένοιτο.. ἄριστος Id.9.71

     (in 4.131,6.37,7.37, τί θέλει ([etym.] θέλοι ) has been conjectured for τὸ of the Mss.); so in [dialect] Att.,

    ἐγῷδ' ὅς ἐστι, Κλεισθένης ὁ Σιβυρτίου Ar.Ach. 118

    , cf. 442, Av. 804, Pl.59, 369, S.OT 1068, OC 1171 ;

    πέμπει πρὸς τὸν Κῦρον, εἰπὼν ὃς ἦν X.Cyr.6.1.46

    , cf. D.52.7;

    δηλώσας ὃς ἦν Arist.Po. 1452a26

     ;

    γράψας παρ' οὗ κομιούμεθα PCair.Zen.150.11

     (iii B. C.).
    b later ὅς = τίς even in direct questions, ἐφ' ὃ πάρει ; Ev.Matt.26.50 ; ἣν δοκεῖς; Arr.Epict.4.1.120 (both dub.).
    7 in exclamations,

    ὦ Ἡράκλεις, ἃ πέπονθα Men.Epit. 146

    .     0-1A a. the Relat. Pron. joined with Particles or Conjs.:
    I ὅς γε, v. ὅσγε.
    II ὃς δή, v. δή 11.2 ; ὃν δήποτε τρόπον in some way or other, Arist.Metaph. 1090a6 ; ὁδήποτε, ἁδήποτε, anything or things whatever, Id.EN 1167a35, 1164a25 ; [full] ὁσδηποτοῦν, Euc.Phaen.p.10 M., Dsc.5.10, Jul.Or.1.18c, IG22.1121.30 (iv A. D.); [full] ὁσδηποτεοῦν, IGRom. 4.915 (Cibyra, i A. D.), IG22.1368.133 (ii A. D.); [full] ὁσδητισοῦν (in [dialect] Boeot. form ὁσδειτισῶν), ib.7.3081.5 (Lebad.) ; [full] ὁσποτοῦν, Dicaearch.2.4.
    III ὃς καί, v. καί B. 6; but καὶ ὅς and who (which), D.23.68.
    2

    Ἀπολλώνιον ὃν καὶ Φᾶβι A.

    , called also Ph., Wilcken Chr.11 A52 (ii B. C.), etc.: for nom. sg. masc. v. καί B. 2.
    IV ὅς κε or κεν, [dialect] Att. ὃς ἄν, whosoever, who if any.., v. ἄν B. 1.2.
    2 ὅς κε is also used so as to contain the antec. in itself, much like εἴ τις as νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδὲν κλαίειν, ὅς κε θάνῃσι I am not wroth that men should weep for whoever be dead, Od.4.196: ὅστις is also used in this way, cf.

    ὅστις 1

    .
    V ὅσπερ, ὅστε, ὅστις, v. sub vocc.     0-2A b. abs. usages of certain Cases of the Relat. Pron.:
    I gen. sg. οὗ, of Place,
    1 like ὅπου, where, A.Pers. 486, S.OC 158 (lyr.), etc.;

    οὗ δή A.Pr. 814

    , v.l. in Pl.Phdr. 248b, etc.;

    οὗπερ A.Th. 1016

    , S. Aj. 1237, OC77, etc.; also of circumstances,

    οὗ γὰρ τοιούτων δεῖ, τοιοῦτός εἰμ' ἐγώ Id.Ph. 1049

     ;

    εἰ γένοιο οὗ νῦν εἰμί Pl.Smp. 194a

    , etc.;

    ἔστιν οὗ

     in some places,

    E.Or. 638

     ;

    οὗ μέν.., οὗ δέ..

     in some places.., in others..,

    Arist.Oec. 1345b34

     : c. gen., οὐκ εἶδεν οὗ γῆς εἰσέδυ in what part of the earth, E.IA[ 1583];

    ἐννοεῖς οὗ ἐστὶ.. τοῦ ἀναμιμνήσκεσθαι Pl.Men. 84a

     ;

    συνιδὼν οὗ κακῶν ἦν Luc.Tox.17

    .
    2 in pregnant phrases, μικρὸν προϊόντες..,οὗ ἡ μάχη ἐγένετο (for ἐκεῖσε οὗ) X.An.2.1.6 ; so

    οὗπερ προσβεβοηθήκει Th.2.86

    , cf. 1.134 ; ἀπιὼν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, οὗ κατέφυγε (for οἷ κατέφυγε καὶ οὗ ἦν) X.Cyr.5.4.14 (dub. l.);

    ἐπειδὰν ἱζήσωμεν οὗ ἄγεις Philostr.Her.Prooem.13

    : in later Gr. οὗ was used simply for οἷ, οὗπερ ἂν ἔλθῃ Tim069, cf. Ev.Luc.10.1, etc.: but in early writers this is f. l., as in D.21.74, etc.
    II dat. fem. ᾗ, [dialect] Dor. ᾇ, of Place, where, or Manner, as, v. ᾗ.
    III old loc. οἷ, as Adv., v. οἷ.
    2 old abl. (?) ὧ, in [dialect] Dor. (cf. ϝοίκω), τηνῶθε καθεῖλον, ὧ ( whence)

    μ' ἐκέλευ καθελεῖν τυ Theoc.3.11

     ;

    ἐν τᾷ πόλι, ὧ κ' ᾖ, καρῡξαι ἐν τἀγορᾷ IG9(1).334.21

     ([dialect] Locr., v B. C.).
    2 in [dialect] Att. ὅ, for which reason, E.Hec.13, Ph. 155, 263, Ar.Ec. 338: also acc. neut. pl. ἅ in this sense, S.Tr. 137 (lyr.), Isoc.8.122.
    3 whereas, Th.2.40,3.12, Ep.Rom.6.10, Ep.Gal.2.20.
    V

    ἀφ' οὗπερ

     from the time that..,

    A.Pers. 177

    .
    VI ἐφ' ᾧ, v. ἐπί B. 111.3.
    ------------------------------------
    ὅς [(B)], ἥ, ὅν (not ὅ, v. Il.1.609,21.305, Od.11.515), gen.
    A

    οἷο Il.3.333

    , Od.1.330, al.,

    οὗ 23.150

    , al. ; Cret. [full] ϝός Leg.Gort.1.18,al., SIG 1183 ; so in [dialect] Aeol., Sapph.Supp.1.6, Lyr.Adesp.32, cf. A.D.Pron. 107.11 :—POSSESS. PRON.:
    I of the 3 pers., his, her, put either before or after its Noun, ᾧ πενθερῷ, ὃν θυμόν, etc., Il.6.170, 202, etc. ;

    ἧς ἀρχῆς IG12.761

     ; πόσιος οὗ, πατέρι ᾧ, Od.23.150,3.39, etc.: sts. also with Art.,

    τὰ ἃ κῆλα Il.12.280

     ;

    τὰ ἃ δώματα Od.14.153

    , etc.; also in Lyr., Pi.O.5.8, P.6.36 (elsewh. Pi. prefers ἑός), B.5.47: sts. in Trag.,

    λέσχας ἇς A.Eu. 367

     (lyr.);

    ὧν παίδων S.OC 1639

     (iamb.);

    ἐκγόνοισιν οἷς E.Med. 955

     (iamb.): with Art.,

    λιτῶν τῶν ὧν A.Th. 641

     ;

    ὅπλων τῶν ὧν S.Aj. 442

    ;

    τῶν ὧν τέκνων Id.Tr. 266

    , cf. 525 (lyr.);

    τοῖς οἷσιν αὐτοῦ Id.OT 1248

    : so in Cret. Prose,

    τὰ ϝὰ αὐτᾶς Leg.Gort. 2.46

     ; in Thgn.1009, ὧν αὐτοῦ κτεάνων is to be restd. for τῶν.. from IG12.499 ; once in Hdt.,

    γυναῖκα ἥν 1.205

    ; never in [dialect] Att. Prose.
    II of the 2 pers., for σός, thy, thine, Hes.Op. 381, AP7.539 (Pers.), Mosch.4.77(dub. in Hom., v. infr.); and
    III of the I pers., for ἐμός, my, mine, Od.9.28,13.320, A.R.4.1015, 1036.—Signfs. II and III were denied for Homer by Aristarch., see esp. A.D.Pron.109.20 ; in Od.9.28 and 34 he (or at least A. D. l.c.) rendered ἧς γαίης and πατρίδος 'a man's own fatherland', and athetized Od.13.320: in Il.14.221, 264,16.36,19.174, al., φρεσὶ σῇσιν has better Ms. authority than φρεσὶν ᾗσιν; and in Od.15.542, cf. 1.402, δώμασι σοῖσιν than δώμασιν οἷσιν; v. ἑός. (Cogn. with Skt. σϝάς 'his (my, thy) own', Slav. stem. svo- (used of all 3 persons, as in Skt.): I.-E. swo- was related to I.-E. sewo-, v. ἑός.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὅς

  • 20 τέλειος

    τέλειος and [full] τέλεος, α, ον, in Trag., [dialect] Att., and [dialect] Dor.also ος, ον, A.Eu. 382 (lyr.), Pl.Phlb. 67a, Arist.EN 1153b16, SIG265 (Delph., iv B.C.), etc.: the form τέλειος is alone used by Hom., neither form in Hes.; τέλεος is alone used by Hdt., exc. in 9.110; in Trag. and [dialect] Att. both forms occur; [dialect] Att. Inscrr. up to the end of iii B.C. have only τέλεος, IG 12.76.39, al., and τέλεος, τελέως, τελεῶ are recommended by Thom. Mag.p.358R.; τέλειος first in IG22.2314.51, al. (early ii B.C.), freq. in Papyri (PCair.Zen.429.13, al. (iii B.C.), etc.), but the neut. used as Adv. is sts. τέλεον ( BGU903.12 (ii A.D.), etc.,
    A

    τέλειον POxy.707.31

     (ii A.D.), etc.): the form [full] τέλεως, acc. τέλεων, with pl. τέλεῳ, is found in SIG1025.61, 1026.14 (Cos, iv/iii B.C.), dub. in Schwyzer 734 ([place name] Zeleia ) and Herod.7.20: the form [full] τέληον in GDI 4963 ([place name] Crete): ([etym.] τέλος):— perfect, of victims, entire, without spot or blemish,

    ἀρνῶν αἰγῶν τε τελείων Il.1.66

    , cf. 24.34; βοτὸν τ. Riv.Fil.56.265 ([place name] Cyrene); τὸνς ϝεξήκοντα τελέονς ὄϝινς (acc. pl.) SIG56.30 (Argos, v. B.C.); of sacrifices, ἱερὰ τ. perfect, of full tale or number, or performed with all rites, Th.5.47, Lexap.And.1.97, D.59.60;

    τελέους ἀεὶ τελετὰς τελούμενος τέλεος ὄντως.. γίγνεται Pl.Phdr. 249c

    ; in Il.8.247, 24.315, αἰετὸς τελειότατος πετεηνῶν is prob. the surest bird of augury (cf. τελήεις).
    b in Dialects, = κύριος, fully constituted, valid,

    ἐν ἀγορᾷ τελείῳ Schwyzer 324.1

     (Delph., iv B.C.), SIG265 (ibid.), etc.; ἀλιαίᾳ ἔδοξε τελείᾳ ib.594.3 (Mycenae, ii B.C.); authoritative, final,

    ἁ δέ κα ϝράτρα ἁ δαμοσία τελεία εἴε ¯ δικάδο ¯ σα Schwyzer412

     ([place name] Elis);

    τὸ θέθμιον.. τέλεον εἶμεν IG9(1).334.47

     ([dialect] Locr., v B.C.); so in Trag., τελεία ψῆφος a final decision, A.Supp. 739, S.Ant. 632.
    2 of animals, full-grown,

    τέλεον νεαροῖς ἐπιθύσας A.Ag. 1504

     (anap., and so perh. αἶγες τ. in Il. ll.cc.); ἐπ' οὗ θύεται τὰ τ. τῶν προβάτων, opp. γαλαθηνά, Hdt.1.183, cf. SIG1015.31 (Halic.), Pherecr.44, PCair.Zen.429.13, al. (iii B.C.), Sammelb.5277.5 (iii A.D.), etc.; τ. ζῷον defined in Gal.7.677; as Subst.,

    τέλειον καὶ δέκα ἄρνες SIG1024.35

     (Myconus, iii/ii B.C.); τ. ἵππος, opp. πῶλος, Pl.Lg. 834c; τ. ἅρμα a chariot drawn by horses, opp. ἅρμα πωλικόν, CIG2758 111.D2 ([place name] Aphrodisias), SIG840 (Olympia, ii A.D.), Luc.Tim.50;

    τελέᾳ συνωρίδι IG5(2).549.2

    , al. (Arc., iv B.C.); τελέῳ τεθρίππῳ ib.5; κέλητι τελέῳ ib.550.29; κέλητι τελείῳ ib.7.1772.14, cf. 16; of trees, Thphr.CP3.7.5, POxy.909.18 (iii A.D.); εἰκὼν τελεία life-sized, GDI4942b7 (Crete, ii B.C.); of a torsionengine, full-sized, opp. to the model of one, Ph.Bel.55.30: of human beings, full-grown, adult, Pl.Lg. 929c, X.Cyr.1.2.4, 12, 14, BGU1100.10 (i B.C.), POxy.485.30 (ii A.D.), Sor.1.10, al.
    b married,

    τέλειοι οἱ γεγαμηκότες Paus.Gr.Fr.306

    ; Ἥρα Τελεία is so expld. at Stymphalus, Paus.8.22.2, cf. Aristocl.Hist.5 (ap.Sch.Theoc.15.64); v. infr. 11.
    3 of persons, accomplished, perfect in his kind, in relation to quality, Isoc. 12.32,242;

    ἱστοριῶν συγγραφέα τέλειον Supp.Epigr.1.400

     (Samos, ii A.D.);

    τ. σοφιστής Pl.Cra. 403e

    ;

    τ. εἴς τι Id.Phdr. 269e

     ([comp] Sup.);

    κατὰ πάντα Id.Ti. 30d

    ;

    πρός τι Id.Lg. 647d

    , 678b, Isoc.12.9, etc.;

    ἔν τινι Id.Ep.4.3

     ([comp] Sup.);

    οἱ τ. δογματικοί Gal.15.60

    ; but ἡ τελεία μαῖα the trained or qualified midwife, distd. from ἡ ἀρίστη (the trained and experienced midwife), Sor.1.4.
    b of things,

    φάρμακον τελεώτατον Pl.Criti. 106b

    ; τ. ἀρετή, φιλία, etc., Arist.EN 1129b30, 1156b34, al.; of a syllogism in the [ per.] 1st figure, the other figures being ἀτελεῖς, Id.APr. 27a1, etc.;

    τὸ τελεώτατον ἐκεῖνο γυμνάσιον, ὂ δὴ καὶ κατασκευὴν ὀνομάζουσι Gal.6.169

    , cf. 208: even of evils, τ. νόσημα a serious, dangerous illness, Hp.Prorrh.2.30;

    τελειοτάτη κακία Gal.16.500

    ; ἀδικία τελέα, τελεωτάτη, absolute, Pl.R. 348b, 344a; συνθέσεις λευκὰς τελείας δέκα τρεῖς thirteen complete white suits, PHamb.10.14 (ii A.D.); τ. ἀποζυγή complete divorce, PGrenf. 2.76.19 (iv A.D.); ὕνις τελεία, κράβακτος ξύλινος τ., etc., PTeb.406.19, al. (iii A.D.); of land, fully inundated, opp. ἀβροχικός, PMasp. 107.13, al. (vi A.D.), prob. in PFlor.286.23 (vi A.D.).
    4 of prayers, vows, etc., fulfilled, accomplished,

    εὐχωλαί Pi.Fr.122.15

    ;

    τέλειον ἐπ' εὐχᾷ ἐσλόν Id.P.9.89

    ;

    τελεία γένεος Οἰδίπου τ' ἀρά A.Th. 832

     (lyr.);

    μὰ τὴν τ. τῆς ἐμῆς παιδὸς Δίκην Id.Ag. 1432

    ;

    τέλεα εὔγματα Ar. Th. 353

     (lyr.); of omens or predictions, ὄψις ὀνείρου οὐ τελέη a vision which imported nothing, Hdt.1.121;

    τ. σύμβολον h.Merc. 526

     (s. v.l.);

    τ. τὸ ἐνύπνιον ἀποτετέλεσται Pl.R. 443b

    .
    5 of numbers, full, complete,

    τελέους ἑπτὰ μῆνας Ar.Lys. 104

    ; τ. ἐνιαυτός the great year, Pl. Ti. 39d.
    b in Arithm., of perfectnumbers, which are equal to the sum of their divisors, as 6 = 3+2+1; 28 = 14+7+4+2+1, Id.R. 546b, Euc.7 Def.23, Theo Sm.p.45 H., Nicom.Ar.1.16:—but 9 is τ. ὅτι ἐκ τελείου τοῦ γ ¯ γίνεται, Theol.Ar. 58 (3 is τ. because it has ἀρχή, μέσον, τέλος, ib. 14).
    6 τ. κρατήρ, i.e. the third bowl offered to Ζεὺς Σωτήρ, Ar.Fr. 526, E.Fr. 148.
    II of the gods, having power to fulfil prayer, all-powerful (as implied in A.Ag. 973, Ζεῦ Ζεῦ τέλειε, τὰς ἐμὰς εὐχὰς τέλει) , Ζεὺς τ. Pi.O.13.115, P.1.67;

    τ. ὕψιστον Δία A.Eu.28

    ;

    τελέων τελειότατον κράτος, Ζεῦ Id.Supp. 526

     (lyr.); of Hera ζυγία, the presiding goddess of marriage (v. supr. 1.2 b,

    τέλος 1.6

    ), Pi.N.10.18, A.Eu. 214, Fr. 383, Ar.Th. 973 (lyr.); of Apollo, Theoc.25.22 ([comp] Sup.); of the Eumenides, A.Eu. 382 (lyr.);

    Μοῖραι Supp.Epigr.3.400.9

     (Delph., iii B.C.): generally,

    θεοὶ τέλειοι τέλειαί τε A.Th. 167

     (lyr.);

    πῦρ τέλεον ἄρρητον Lyr.Alex.Adesp.36.14

    : also ἀνὴρ τ. the head or lord of the house, A.Ag. 972.
    III = τελευταῖος, last, S.Tr. 948 (lyr.).
    IV τέλειον, τό, a royal banquet, as a transl. of the Pers. τυκτά, Hdt.9.110.
    2 ἡ τελεία (sc. ἀντίδοτος ) the perfect antidote, effective against all poisons, Scrib. Larg.177.
    VI Τέλεος (sc. μήν(, ὁ, name of a month at Epidaurus, IG42(1).109 ii 114.
    VII Adv. τελέως finally, absolutely, with full authority, A.Eu. 320, 953 (both anap.).
    2 completely, absolutely, thoroughly,

    τ. ἐς ἀσθενὲς ἔρχεται Hdt.1.120

    ; τ. ἐκκλησιάσαιμεν perfectly, Ar.Th. 329 (lyr.);

    τ. ἄφρων Is.12.4

    ;

    ἔρια τ. ῥυπαρά PCair.Zen. 287

     (iii B.C.); τ. μ' ὑπῆλθε completely deceived me, Epicr.9; τ. ἑστιᾶν perfectly, X.Smp.2.2; τ. κινήσεται absolutely, Pl.Tht. 182c; τ. γὰρ ἡμᾶς ἐνώχλει he was a perfect nuisance to us, PCair.Zen.637.4 (iii B.C.); τ. γυμνάζειν put a person through the τέλειον γυμνάσιον, Gal. 6.286; μέσα τ. completely neutral, Id.18(2).59, cf. 79, al.--This is the only form of the Adv. allowed by Thom.Mag.p.358 R., but τελείως is found in Gorg.Hel.18, Isoc.13.18, Pl.Def. 411d, Arist.Metaph. 1021b26, PPetr.3p.114 (iii B.C.), LXX Ju.11.6, Gal.16.639, etc.
    3 the neut. τέλεον is also used as Adv. in later Prose, Luc.Merc.Cond. 5, App.BC1.8, Sor.2.56, etc.
    VIII [comp] Comp. and [comp] Sup.: Hom. uses only τελειότατος: in Prose τελεώτερος, -ώτατος prevail, though the other forms occur in Arist.EN 1097a30, 1174b22. [comp] Comp. Adv.

    τελεώτερον Pl.R. 520b

     ( τελειοτέρως Sch.Il.2.350, v.l. in Procl.Inst.18);

    τελεώτατα Pl.R. 351b

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τέλειος

Страницы
  • 1
  • 2

См. также в других словарях:

  • Early Islamic philosophy — or classical Islamic philosophy is a period of intense philosophical development beginning in the 2nd century AH of the Islamic calendar (early 9th century CE) and lasting until the 6th century AH (late 12th century CE). The period is known as… …   Wikipedia

  • Early Irish literature — Contents 1 The earliest Irish authors 2 The Old Irish glosses 3 Existing manuscript literature 3.1 Early Irish epic or saga …   Wikipedia

  • Prose or Sequence — • A liturgical hymn used on certain festivals before the Gospel in the Mass Catholic Encyclopedia. Kevin Knight. 2006. Prose Or Sequence     Prose or Sequence      …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • Prose poetry — This article refers to a poetic form. For the competitive speech event, see Prose Poetry. TOCrightProse poetry is usually considered a form of poetry written in prose that breaks some of the normal rules associated with prose discourse, for… …   Wikipedia

  • Prose Tristan — The Prose Tristan is an adaptation of the Tristan and Iseult story into a long prose romance, and the first to tie the subject entirely into the arc of the Arthurian legend. It was also the first major Arthurian prose cycle commenced after the… …   Wikipedia

  • nonfictional prose — Introduction       any literary work that is based mainly on fact, even though it may contain fictional elements. Examples are the essay and biography.       Defining nonfictional prose literature is an immensely challenging task. This type of… …   Universalium

  • fable, parable, and allegory — Introduction       any form of imaginative literature (allegory) or spoken utterance constructed in such a way that readers or listeners are encouraged to look for meanings hidden beneath the literal surface of the fiction. A story (rhetoric) is… …   Universalium

  • Germanic religion and mythology — Introduction       complex of stories, lore, and beliefs about the gods and the nature of the cosmos developed by the Germanic speaking peoples before their conversion to Christianity.       Germanic culture extended, at various times, from the… …   Universalium

  • Spanish Language and Literature — • As a medium of literary expression Spanish asserted itself first in the twelfth century: it had been six or seven centuries in the process of evolution out of Latin Catholic Encyclopedia. Kevin Knight. 2006. Spanish Language and Literature      …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • LETTERS AND LETTER WRITERS — The letter holds an honored place in Jewish history and literature and includes diplomatic correspondence, state papers, and letters as vehicles of religious or secular literature and as a means of polemics in communal and spiritual matters,… …   Encyclopedia of Judaism

  • Augustan prose — is somewhat ill defined, as the definition of Augustan relies primarily upon changes in taste in poetry. However, the general time represented by Augustan literature saw a rise in prose writing as high literature. The essay, satire, and dialogue… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»